JP6738364B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A gaming machine has been proposed that, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, notifies the player by making a lamp emit light in a color corresponding to the changed display mode (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-43099, A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when notification is given by light emission of a lamp when the display mode of a plurality of hold displays changes, which of the plurality of hold displays is the target of the notification is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may mistakenly recognize that the interest in the game is deteriorated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in amusement of the game.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (such as a big hit gaming state),
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display) corresponding to the variable display which has not been executed yet (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step S161),
A predetermined effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect for changing the display mode of the specific display displayed by the specific display means;
A specific effect means capable of executing the specific effect when the display mode of the specific display is changed by the predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step 003AKS203),
Equipped with
The specific rendering means includes a first rendering means (for example, a first light emitting unit 003AKC1) and a second rendering unit (for example, a second light emitting unit 003AKC2),
In accordance with the ratio being controlled in the preferred state, as the specific effect, first specific effect of using the first directing hand stage and (for example, the specific effect of the first representation embodiment), the pre-Symbol second effect hand stage A second specific effect (for example, a specific effect in the second effect mode) to be used, and a third specific effect (for example, a specific effect in the third effect mode) that uses both the first effect means and the second effect means. , Either of
When the display mode of one specific display is changed by the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect means changes the display mode of the other specific display by executing the predetermined effect on another specific display. It is possible to
One specific display of the display mode is changed, if the specific effect of using the sac Chi hand the first representation section and the second representation section is executed, the other display mode of the specific display When changing , the execution of the specific effect using the other of the first effect means and the second effect means is restricted (for example, the specific effect is being executed in the specific effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-11). If it is determined that there is (step 003AKS402; Yes), the specific effect determination process is terminated),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing which particular display the particular effect is associated with, which lowers the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
It is possible to execute a plurality of effects related to the specific display displayed by the specific display means (for example, a preliminary display notice) in the same period.
You may do it.
With such a configuration, it is possible to show that there are a plurality of opportunities for giving a game value that is advantageous to the player, by the specific display, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the specific effect related to the one specific display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other specific display is not executed until at least the variable display corresponding to the one specific display ends. (For example, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, a specific effect related to another hold display is executed at a predetermined timing after the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is finished. To limit),
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing which particular display the particular effect is associated with, which lowers the interest of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
When the first specific effect is executed as the specific effect, it is controlled to the advantageous state at a lower rate than when the second specific effect is executed as the specific effect (for example, the specific effect in the first effect mode). When executed, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode),
The first effect means is provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared to the second effect means (for example, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 is provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared with the second light emitting unit 003AKC2),
You may do it.
With such a configuration, the player's attention can be favorably gathered.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific effect related to the one specific display is started before the variable display corresponding to the one specific display is started, and can be continued even after the variable display is started (for example, The specific effect related to the one hold display is started before the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started, and can be continued even after the variable display is started),
It is possible to change the effect mode of the specific effect from one effect mode to another effect mode indicating that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the one effect mode (for example, rank-up effect can be executed. Is),
You may do it.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine related to a characteristic part 003AK. It is the figure which shows the constitution example of the production control command which relates to feature section 003AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the hold display data storage part etc. which concern on the characteristic part 003AK. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of the prefetch advance notice setting process which concerns on the characteristic part 003AK. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to a characteristic unit 003AK. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of the pending display change determination process which concerns on the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting etc. of the hold display change pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 003AK. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of the specific effect determination process which concerns on the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the rank-up production pattern etc. which concern on the characteristic part 003AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during change display concerning a characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation operation which concerns on the characteristic part 003AK. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach lost variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification in each setting value. It is a timing chart showing the flow of various effects. It is an explanatory view showing a continuation rate suggestive effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of continuation rate suggestion production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a holding continuous production determination table and an effect determination table when there is a holding continuous production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reservation continuous production processing. It is the figure which shows the production operation example of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a setting suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting suggestion production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion production determination table of a modification. It is the figure which shows the production operation example of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a setting suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting suggestion production processing. It is a figure which shows the information display apparatus which concerns on the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the RAM clear state at the time of starting which concerns on the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation of the information display apparatus which concerns on the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation of the information display apparatus which concerns on the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation of the information display apparatus which concerns on the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation of the information display apparatus which concerns on the characteristic part 109AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the counting production setting processing concerning the characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the determination rate in the count production setting process which concerns on the characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the determination rate in the count production setting process which concerns on the characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the production content of the counting production which concerns on the characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation operation which concerns on the characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation operation which concerns on the characteristic part 110AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first reserved memory number is displayed by, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, and thus the tip of the movable wing piece. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize hole (the second starting prize hole is also closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the tilted position of the movable wing piece (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 is provided which is always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of LEDs that have been lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol loss symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol defect". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning a prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state to be described later (starting winning occurs, In the case where the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. When a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, by shortening the average figure change time (the period during which figure changes) compared to the normal state, and improving the probability of "per figure" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, a probability change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later. Is an aspect in which is continuing.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" and the like) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" which is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-determination variation pattern (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "" which is a predetermined small hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of a part of big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when "small hit" A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed as a stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening of big winning opening, winning of prize, number of reserved memories, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The production control CPU 120 displays the execution of production based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal, a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that power recovery has been performed or that power recovery is in progress. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S2).
1). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the execution and suspension management of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure symbols.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the starting winning prize thus set to be transmitted is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type when "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". Includes processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether there is reach, etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from when the special symbol starts varying. It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, in accordance with which the big hit type is, the upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is ended.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing is ended.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the big hit ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small hitting open process ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation for informing the end of the small hitting game state is executed. here,
When the small hit game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 may be stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the production control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes prefetching advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various types The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command designating to end the small winning game state from the main board 11, for example. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit medium effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid production processing, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various production controls in the big hit gaming state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives points based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

Also, the game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, a hardware resource on the side of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like may be directly used. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 003AK)
Hereinafter, the characteristic unit 003AK according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 8-1 shows a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic part 003AK. An active display area 003AKA1 is provided on the screen of the image display device 5. In the active display area 003AKA1, active display is performed by displaying effect images corresponding to the variable display being executed.

Further, on the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display area 003AKB1 and a second hold display area 003AKB2 are provided. In the present embodiment, as a specific display for notifying an opportunity of giving a game value advantageous to the player, a hold display can be displayed in the first hold display area 003AKB1 and the second hold display area 003AKB2. Specifically, in the first hold display area 003AKB1, hold display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held, according to the first hold storage number. In the second hold display area 003AKB2, hold display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display of which execution is held, according to the second hold storage number. The hold display in the first hold display area 003AKB1 is also referred to as "first hold display", and the hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2 is also referred to as "second hold display".

The first hold display area 003AKB1 may be configured such that the display area is configured such that the first hold display is performed right justified, for example. The first hold display area 003AKB1 is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit value "4" of the first hold storage number, and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" in order from the right end. , "4". Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning hole, the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is increased. At this time, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display area 003AKB1, the increased first hold is displayed on the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” in the first hold display area 003AKB1. A display of an effect image showing a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the stored number. If there is another first hold display in the first hold display area 003AKB1, a display in the first hold display area 003AKB1 next to the left of the other first hold display is in the non-display state. At the part (display part corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”), the effect image showing the new first holding display is displayed as the holding display corresponding to the increased first holding storage number. Add a display. When there is one or a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display area 003AKB1, when the new first special figure game is started, the hold number corresponds to “1” in the first hold display area 003AKB1. The first reserved display is erased (digested) at the display portion on the right end. At this time, if there are first hold displays in the display parts corresponding to other hold numbers “2” to “4”, those first hold displays are moved to the right side which is the direction of the deleted display part ( Shift). As described above, in the first hold display area 003AKB1, it is possible to display the first hold display corresponding to the first special figure game which has not been started yet and has been held in execution, depending on the first hold storage number.

In the second hold display area 003AKB2, for example, the display area may be configured such that the second hold display is performed by left-justifying. The second hold display area 003AKB2 is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit value “4” of the second hold storage number, and the hold numbers “1”, “2”, and “3” in order from the left end. , "4". Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting winning opening, the number of second reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is increased. At this time, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2, the increased second hold is displayed in the leftmost display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second hold display area 003AKB2. A display of an effect image showing a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the stored number. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2, a display that is in the non-display state next to the right of the display part where the other second hold display is being performed in the second hold display area 003AKB2 At the part (display part corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”), a production image showing a new second holding display is displayed as the holding display corresponding to the increased second holding storage number. Add a display. When there is one or more second hold displays in the second hold display area 003AKB2, when the new second special figure game is started, the hold number corresponds to "1" in the second hold display area 003AKB2. The second reserved display is erased (digested) at the display portion at the left end. At this time, if there are second hold displays on the display parts corresponding to other hold numbers “2” to “4”, those second hold displays are moved to the left side which is the direction of the deleted display part ( Shift). As described above, in the second hold display area 003AKB2, it is possible to display the second hold display corresponding to the second special figure game which is not started yet and is held to be executed, depending on the second hold storage number.

In the active display area 003AKA1, in response to the start of the first special figure game, active display corresponding to the first hold display erased (digested) in the first hold display area 003AKB1 is started. In the active display area 003AKA1, the active display corresponding to the second hold display erased (digested) in the second hold display area 003AKB2 is started in response to the start of the second special figure game. It should be noted that the first hold display or the second hold display and the active display may have the same color or pattern, and for example, the active display may be displayed larger than the first hold display or the second hold display. It may be. If the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display is changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode due to a change in the hold display described later, the changed display mode is also active display. Taken over. The display mode of the active display may be changed to a display mode different from the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect.

On the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 003AKA1 is arranged between the first reserved display area 003AKB1 and the second reserved display area 003AKB2. On the other hand, the active display area 003AKA1, the first reserved display area 003AKB1, and the second reserved display area 003AKB2 may be arranged at arbitrary positions on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the first reserved display area 003AKB1 and the second reserved display area 003AKB2 may be replaced with each other without changing the arrangement of the active display area 003AKA1.

In the present embodiment, a pending display notice can be executed as an effect related to the pending display that is a specific display. The hold display notice is, as an example of the prefetch notice effect, at least one of the first hold displays in the first hold display area 003AKB1, or at least one of the second hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2. Is changed to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time, and a notice is given that the variable display corresponding to the hold display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to a big hit game state. The change in the hold display in the hold display notice is also referred to as a "hold display change". Due to the change of the hold display, the display color of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not started yet is changed to a specific color (for example, blue, green, red, gold, etc.) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in normal times. By doing so, it is sufficient to make it possible to recognize the change in the display mode of the hold display and to suggest that the display result of the variable display becomes “big hit” at a predetermined ratio. Alternatively, by changing the display pattern in the hold display to a specific pattern (for example, a cherry tree pattern) different from a predetermined pattern (for example, a plain pattern) in the normal state, the expectation that the display result of the variable display is a “big hit” is normal. It may be possible to suggest that it is higher than the above. Alternatively, by setting a display mode in which a predetermined message (for example, "chance", "heat", "heat", etc.) is displayed as the hold display, the expectation that the display result of the variable display will be "big hit" is increased. You may be able to suggest that you are present.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of pending display notices can be executed in the same period. Specifically, while a hold display notice related to one hold display is being executed, a hold display notice related to another hold display may be executed.

The game board 2 is provided with a first light emitting unit 003AKC1. The game machine frame 3 is provided with a second light emitting unit 003AKC2. The first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 include a light emitting unit such as a lamp and an LED, and can emit light. Note that FIG. 8A shows a state in which both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 are emitting light.

The first light emitting unit 003AKC1 which is the first effect means is provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared with the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 which is the second effect unit. More specifically, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 provided on the game board 2 on which the image display device 5 is arranged is the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. Compared to, the image display device 5 is provided near the image display device 5, which the player is paying attention to during the game. Therefore, the player's line of sight is more likely to be guided to the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 than to the second light emitting unit 003AKC2, and the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 is more easily recognized by the player than the second light emitting unit 003AKC2.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect can be executed in association with the hold display which is the specific display. The specific effect is executed by causing (using) at least one of the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 which is the first effecting device and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 which is the second effecting device. Specifically, the specific effect includes a first effect mode in which only the first light emitting section 003AKC1 of the first light emitting section 003AKC1 and the second light emitting section 003AKC2 emits light, and a first light emitting section 003AKC1 and a second light emitting section 003AKC2. Of these, a second effect mode in which only the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emits light and a third effect mode in which both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emit light are executed in any one of the effect modes. .. The jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are different depending on which of the first presentation aspect, the second presentation aspect, and the third presentation aspect is performed. Controlled to the jackpot gaming state). Specifically, in the case where the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation degree are lower than those in the case where the specific effect is executed in the second effect aspect (the advantageous state at a low rate. As a jackpot game state is controlled). When the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation degree are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the third effect aspect. Therefore, the player can recognize the proportion controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state based on the rendering mode of the specific rendering. That is, the specific effect is an effect that suggests the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state. As described above, the specific effect of the first effect mode has a lower jackpot reliability and a higher expectation of jackpot compared to the specific effect of the second effect aspect or the third effect aspect, but is higher than that of the second light emitting unit 003AKC2. It is executed using the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 which is easily recognized by the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and appropriately attract the attention of the player. More specifically, since the use of the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 that is easily recognized by the player for the purpose of the production fuels the expectation of the player, even if the relevant production (specific production of the first production mode) is performed. Even if the jackpot reliability or the jackpot expectation is low, the player's expectation can be maintained, the player's attention can be favorably gathered, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect related to the one hold display is the timing before the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started, and the display mode of the one hold display is the hold display. It starts from the timing changed by the change, and then continues even after the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started. In other words, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed as an example of the prefetching notice effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed in association with (corresponding to) the pending display change. In the present embodiment, the specific effect related to the one hold display ends at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the one hold display ends.

In the present embodiment, during execution of the specific effect, the rank of changing the effect mode of the specific effect from one effect mode to another effect mode having a higher jackpot reliability or a higher jackpot expectation degree than the one effect mode. It is configured to be able to execute up production. Specifically, when the rank-up effect is executed in the present embodiment, the specific effect related to the one hold display is changed from the timing when the display mode of the one hold display changes due to the hold display change to After the start of the production mode of, the continuation is continued after the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started, and the production mode of the specific production is changed from the one production mode during the execution of the variable display. , A big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree higher than the one effect mode is changed.

Note that, as described above, a plurality of pending display notices may be executed in the same period. In the present embodiment, when the specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to another hold display is restricted from being executed. That is, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, even if a hold display notice related to another hold display is executed and the display mode of the other hold display changes due to the hold display change, The specific effect related to the other hold display is restricted from being executed. In the hold display notice, the player does not misunderstand which hold display the hold display notice was executed, whereas in the specific effect, the particular effect is executed in association with which hold display. The player may mistakenly recognize whether the game has been played and the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when the specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect is executed in association with which hold display by limiting not to execute the specific effect related to the other hold display. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing Taka and to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to another hold display is restricted from being executed, while The hold display notice may be executed in the same period. That is, while the specific effect related to the one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other hold display is restricted from being executed while the specific effect related to the one hold display is being executed. Even if there is a hold display notice related to other hold displays is not limited. As described above, in the specific effect, the player may misunderstand which of the pending displays the specific effect was performed, and the gaming enjoyment may decrease, whereas in the pending display notice, This is because the player does not erroneously recognize which hold display is executed in association with the hold display notice.

FIG. 8-2 shows an example of the configuration of the effect control command used as the command for winning the starting opening for the characteristic part 003AK. In the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command that specifies the occurrence of the start winning is performed. As an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start winning a prize, a start opening winning a prize designating command is prepared in advance. In the start winning determination process, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the number of reserved memories is performed. As the effect control command for designating the number of reserved memories, a notice of the number of reserved memories is prepared in advance. Further, in the start winning determination process, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command that specifies the determination result of the look-ahead determination is performed. As the effect control command for designating the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a winning determination result command is prepared in advance.

FIG. 8-2(A) shows a setting example of the start mouth winning award designating command, the held storage number notification command, and the winning determination result command. The starting mouth winning designation command includes a command B100H which is a first starting mouth winning designation command and a command B200H which is a second starting mouth winning designation command. The subscript H indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The reserved storage number notification command includes a command C1XXH which is the first reserved storage number notification command and a command C2XXH which is the second reserved storage number notification command. It should be noted that XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the pending storage number notification command, different EXT data (for example, any of 00H to 04H) is set according to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. The winning determination result command may be a command C4XXH including a value set according to the determination result of the prefetching determination.

When the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, the first reserved memory number is By determining that the upper limit value has not been reached, the first starting condition is satisfied. The first start condition is a condition for executing a special figure game (first special figure game) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first starting condition is satisfied, the main starting board 11 transmits to the effect control board 12 a first starting opening winning award designation command, a winning determination result command, and a first reserved memory number notification command. When the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, the second number of reserved memories. Is determined not to reach the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second starting condition is a condition for executing a special figure game (second special figure game) using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the main board 11 transmits to the effect control board 12 a second start opening winning award designation command, a winning determination result command, and a second reserved memory number notification command.

On the side of the effect control board 12, it is possible to detect the establishment of the first starting condition by receiving the first starting opening winning award designating command, and the establishment of the second starting condition is received by receiving the second starting opening winning award designating command. it can. In this way, the first start opening winning award designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning award designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The determination result command at the time of winning is when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected, and when the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (the winning judgment result) using the game random number (the random number value for determining the special figure display result, etc.) extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is given to the effect control board 12 side. Notice. The first reserved memory number notification command notifies the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number notification command notifies the second special figure reserved memory number.

FIG. 8-2(B) exemplifies the notification contents by the winning determination result command. Among the winning determination result commands, the command C402H, the command C403H, and the command C404H may be transmitted when the random number value for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. The result of winning determination that the big hit game state is not controlled by being determined as "miss" is notified. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the special figure display result is within the big hit determination range, and the display result of the special figure game is determined to be "big hit", whereby the big hit game state is controlled. The winning determination result (variable display content is "big hit") is notified. The command C400H notifies that the winning determination is restricted. The command C402H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the variation pattern is within the super-reach fixed range at the time of losing, and the winning determination result (variable display contents are determined to be the variation pattern involving super-reach at the time of losing). "Confirm Super Reach when lost"). On the other hand, the command C403H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the variation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss, and the variation determination result with the reach effect is determined at the time of loss (variable result). Notify that the displayed content is "Reach confirmed at loss"). Further, the command C404H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the variation pattern is neither within the super reach determination range nor the reach determination range at the time of losing, and there is a possibility that the variation pattern with the reach effect may not be determined. The time determination result (variable display content is "general when lost") is notified. In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random numbers extracted at the time of winning the start to determine whether the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" or a specific variation pattern. It is transmitted as determination result information notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

FIG. 8C illustrates a configuration example of a variation pattern regarding the characteristic part 003AK. These variation patterns may be prepared in advance so that they can be used in place of some or all of the variation patterns in the above-described embodiment, or together with some or all of the variation patterns in the above-described embodiments. The plurality of fluctuation patterns differ in the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern. The special figure variation time is a time required from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the stop display of the fixed special symbol in the special figure games such as the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The plurality of variation patterns regarding the characteristic part 003AK include a variation pattern corresponding to any of "non-reach", "reach", and "big hit". "Non-reach" is a case where the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost". "Reach" is a case where the fixed decorative pattern of the reach combination that is not the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost". "Big hit" is a case where the fixed decorative design of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "big hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to "non-reach" is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach" is a reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "big hit" is a big hit fluctuation pattern. The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss variation pattern.

The plurality of variation patterns regarding the characteristic part 003AK include a variation pattern capable of executing one to three times of pseudo-repeated variation as the pseudo-reproduction. The pseudo-continuous variation is a variable display in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped and then restarted during the variable display of the decorative design. When the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the variable display may be temporarily stopped in a temporary stop mode different from the case where the pseudo continuous variation is not executed, for example, by temporary stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol. The pseudo continuous effect may be such that the variable display is temporarily stopped in a temporary stop mode in which the player can recognize, or the variable display is temporarily stopped in a temporary stop mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize (instantaneous stop, etc.). ). Alternatively, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously executed, while the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 and the speaker 8L corresponding to the predetermined continuation mode. Output of sound by 8R, lighting of light-emitting members such as game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED, operation of movable members, or a combination of some or all of these, variable display that causes all symbol variations again or continuously. You may notify that it will be performed. The variable display, which is a variation of all symbols, changes the decoration symbol at high speed in all of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R which are “left”, “middle” and “right” provided in the image display device 5. Includes variable display.

Of the plurality of variation patterns related to the characteristic part 003AK, for example, the variation pattern PA1-4 is a variation pattern capable of executing the pseudo continuous effect including one pseudo continuous variation corresponding to “non-reach”. The variation patterns PA2-2 and PB2-2 are variation patterns capable of executing the pseudo continuous effect including one pseudo continuous change corresponding to "reach". The variation patterns PA2-3 and PB2-3 are variation patterns capable of executing the pseudo continuous effect including the pseudo continuous variation twice corresponding to the “reach”. The variation pattern PB2-4 is a variation pattern capable of executing the pseudo-relation effect including the pseudo-repetition fluctuation three times corresponding to the “reach”. Further, the variation patterns PA3-2 and PB3-2 are variation patterns capable of executing a pseudo-relation effect including one pseudo-repetition variation corresponding to the "big hit". The variation patterns PA3-3 and PB3-3 are variation patterns capable of executing the pseudo continuous effect including the pseudo continuous variation twice corresponding to the “big hit”. The variation pattern PB3-4 is a variation pattern capable of executing the pseudo continuous effect including the pseudo continuous variation three times corresponding to the “big hit”.

8-4 and 8-5 show configuration examples of the variation pattern determination table regarding the characteristic part 003AK. FIG. 8-4(A) shows the variation pattern determination table 003AKT1 corresponding to the normal time loss, and FIG. 8-4(B) shows the variation pattern determination table 003AKT2 corresponding to the time saving medium loss. FIG. 8-5 shows a fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT3 corresponding to a big hit. The normal time misalignment is a case where the display result of the variable display is "misalignment" at the normal time when the time saving control is not performed. The time saving middle loss is a case where the display result of the variable display is “miss” during the time saving during the time saving control. In the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, if the "time loss control" is "normal" when it is not performed, if it becomes "loss" during the time reduction when the time reduction control is performed Alternatively, the variation pattern is determined by using the determination table selected from the variation pattern determination tables 003AKT1 to 003AKT3 according to the case of a “big hit”. When determining the fluctuation pattern, the numerical data indicating the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is read from the fluctuation random number buffer. The random number buffer for variation can store the random number value extracted when the start winning determination process is executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. The effect control CPU 120 compares the random value for fluctuation pattern determination read from the random number buffer for fluctuation with a determination value set in advance in the selected fluctuation pattern determination table. Then, in the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern, the variation pattern as the usage pattern is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random value for determining the variation pattern. It should be noted that it may be determined by a process different from the determination of the variation pattern whether or not the reach mode is set in the case of “miss”.

For the plurality of fluctuation patterns to which the determination value is assigned in the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT1, the first reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the first special figure, is 0, 1, or 2 or more. A variation pattern in which the number of assigned determination values differs depending on whether the value is With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol can be changed according to the first reserved storage number. When the first number of reserved storages is equal to or larger than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) is made shorter than when the first number of reserved storages is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that

In the normal time when the time saving control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed less frequently. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the same table as when the first reserved memory number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the second reserved memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the data. Alternatively, irrespective of the second reserved memory number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special diagram is satisfied, the table data corresponding to the first reserved memory number at that time point is referred to A decision may be made. Alternatively, in response to the special figure game using the second special figure being executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the variation pattern determination table 003AKT1 regardless of the second number of reserved memories. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to table data having different determination value allocations from the above. Alternatively, when the condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the “first reserved memory number” in the variation pattern determination table 003AKT1 is replaced with the “second reserved memory number”, and the second reserved memory number is read. The variation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data according to the above.

In the variation pattern determination table 003AKT2, there is a variation pattern in which the number of assigned determination values is different depending on which value the second reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol may be made different according to the second reserved storage number. When the second reserved storage number is equal to or larger than a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time can be shortened as compared with when the second reserved storage number is smaller than the predetermined value. It suffices that the judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT2, the number of determination values assigned to the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT1 is larger than that of the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT1 for the fluctuation pattern having a short special drawing fluctuation time. In addition, a determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern. With this, it is only necessary to be able to shorten the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol during the time saving in which the time saving control is performed, as compared with the normal time in which the time saving control is not performed.

During the time saving in which the time saving control is performed, the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening, and the special drawing game using the second special drawing is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated during the time saving period. It is likely to be executed, and the special figure game using the first special figure is executed less frequently. Then, when the condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second number of reserved memories is zero. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the same table as when the second reserved memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the first reserved memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the data. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to table data having a different determination value allocation from the variation pattern determination table 003AKT2 regardless of the number of first reserved memories. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the “second reserved storage number” in the variation pattern determination table 003AKT2 is replaced with the “first reserved storage number” to change the first reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data according to the above.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table 003AKT3, the number of determination values assigned to the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the reach effect that is the super reach such as the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 is the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3. A determination value is assigned to each variation pattern such that the number of determination values is greater than the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect that is the normal reach. In the variation pattern determination tables 003AKT1 and 003AKT2, the number of determination values assigned to the variation patterns accompanied by the reach effect that is the normal reach, such as the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, is the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-4. As described above, the determination value is assigned to each variation pattern such that the number of determination values is greater than the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern with the reach effect that is the super reach. As a result, when the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed and then the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, even if the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed, the reach effect that becomes the super reach is not executed and the variable display of the variable display is performed. The jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the display result is stopped and displayed.

The plurality of variation patterns to which the determination values are assigned in the variation pattern determination tables 003AKT1 to 003AKT3 are assigned the determination values according to whether or not the pseudo-relational effect is executed and the number of times the pseudo-reciprocal variation is executed. The fluctuation patterns with different numbers of are included. The number of determination values assigned to the reach variation pattern is the largest when the pseudo continuous production is not executed, and decreases as the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation in the pseudo continuous production increases. The variation is the smallest when it is executed, and the super reach is the smallest when three pseudo-continuous fluctuations are executed. If the number of the determination values assigned to the big hit variation pattern is normal reach, the pseudo consecutive variation is performed twice compared to the case where the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed and the case where one pseudo consecutive variation is executed. In the case of super reach, the number is the smallest when the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, and increases as the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation in the pseudo continuous production increases, and when the pseudo continuous variation is executed three times. Most often. With such a setting, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation can be changed depending on whether or not the pseudo-relation effect is executed and the number of times the pseudo-repetition variation is executed. A determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern so that the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher when the pseudo-relational effect is executed than when the pseudo-rear effect is not executed. Also, when the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation in the pseudo continuous production is smaller than when the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is small, a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation degree are high. It has to be done. The big hit reliability and the big hit expectation degree differ depending on whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is executed and, if it is executed, the number of times the pseudo continuous variation is executed. Therefore, in the pseudo continuous production, as the expectation degree that is controlled to the big hitting game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, the expectation degree which is different depending on the presence or absence of the pseudo continuous production and the number of times the pseudo continuous variation is executed is given to the player. Can be suggested. In this respect, the pseudo continuous effect is included in the notice effect that gives a notice that the control is performed in the advantageous state.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows an example of the configuration of the hold display data storage unit for the characteristic unit 003AK. The hold display data storage unit may be provided in, for example, a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, an effect control buffer setting unit). The hold display data storage unit corresponds to the fact that the execution of the first special figure game is on hold and the execution of the second special figure game is on hold in the first hold display area 003AKB1. Various data for performing the hold display and various data for performing the second hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2 are stored as hold display data. As the hold display data storage unit, a first hold display data storage unit corresponding to the hold storage display of the first special figure game and a second hold display data storage unit corresponding to the hold storage display of the second special figure game are provided. It has to be done. In the hold display data storage unit, for example, in order to store data indicating a winning determination result, a hold display image, and a final display image in association with the hold numbers in the first hold display area 003AKB1 and the second hold display 003AKB2. Storage area is reserved. The reserved display data storage unit uses a part (eg, a storage area for a prize determination result command) or all of the first start prize command buffer or the second start prize command buffer, or the first start prize command buffer. It may be configured as a storage unit separate from the second start winning command buffer.

The winning determination result that can be stored by the hold display data indicates the determination result of the look-ahead determination that is specified based on the winning determination result command. The winning determination result specified based on the winning determination result command includes “big hit”, “super reach determination on loss”, “reach determination on loss”, and “miss general”. When the winning determination result of "big hit" is notified by the winning determination result command, it is specified that the display result of the variable display as the determination target is "big hit". If any of the following results is displayed by the prize judgment result command: “Super reach on loss”, “Reach on loss”, or “General on loss” is displayed, the display result of the variable display that is the determination target is Is specified. The hold display image that can be stored by the hold display data is displayed in the first hold display area 003AKB1 and the second hold display area 003AKB2, so that it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of the special figure game that has not been started and the number of hold. It is a rendering image. The final display image that can be stored by the hold display data is the effect image for hold display that is finally displayed in the first hold display area 003AKB1 or the second hold display area 003AKB2.

FIGS. 8-6(B1) to (B5) show a plurality of effect images that can be used for the hold display and active display regarding the characteristic part 003AK. In this embodiment, five display images 003AKD0 to 003AKD4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for hold display and active display. The number of display images that can be used for hold display and active display is not limited to five, and may be a plurality of images based on any design. The display image 003AKD0 is an effect image in the case where a round solid white display is performed. The display image 003AKD1 is an effect image in the case of performing round solid blue display. The display image 003AKD2 is an effect image in the case where a round solid green display is performed. The display image 003AKD3 is an effect image in the case of performing round solid red display. The display image 003AKD4 is an effect image in the case of performing a round solid color gold display. The normal display mode in the hold display or the active display is a round plain white display.

In the hold display notice, there are cases where the display color of the hold display is any one of blue, green, red, and gold. Of these, when the display color is red or gold, the jackpot reliability and jackpot expectation are higher than when the display color is blue or green.

FIG. 8-7(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S161 of the effect control process process as the prefetching notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process, it is determined whether or not a command for winning the start mouth is received (step 003AKS101). The start mouth winning award command includes a start mouth winning award designation command, a reserved memory number notification command, and a winning determination result command. In step 003AKS101, for example, it is confirmed whether or not a start mouth prize designation command, a prize determination result command, and a reserved memory number notification command are newly stored in the first start prize command buffer or the second start prize command buffer. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not a command is received at the time of starting winning.

If no command is received at step 003AKS101 (step 003AKS101; No), the prefetching advance notice setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command has been received (step 003AKS101; Yes), the notification content by the received command is specified (step 003AKS102). For example, the winning determination result is specified as the notification content by the winning determination result command. Then, the final display image is determined (step 003AKS103). The final display image is an effect image finally displayed as the first hold display or the second hold display. The effect control CPU 120 extracts a random value for final display image determination, and based on the random value, refers to the final display image determination table in accordance with the winning determination result specified in step 003AKS102. The display image may be determined. After that, after setting the update of the hold display at the time of winning the start prize (step 003AKS104), the pre-reading notice setting process is ended. The contents stored in the hold display data storage unit may be updated along with the update setting of the hold display at the time of winning the start prize. At this time, the winning determination result specified from the winning determination result command, the display image 003AKD0 when the white display is performed as the initial reserved display image, and the step 003AKS103 are determined at the beginning of the empty area in the reserved display data storage unit. The final display image may be stored by storing pending display data that can be specified.

FIG. 8-7(B) shows a configuration example of the final display image determination table 003AKT4. In step 003AKS103 of the prefetching advance notice setting process, the final display image may be determined by referring to the final display image determination table 003AKT4. In the final display image determination table 003AKT4, a determination value that is a numerical value that is compared with a random number value for determining the final display image according to the winning determination result may be assigned to the final display image determination result. The final display image determination table 003AKT4 is configured with table data such that the final display image to which the determination value is assigned differs depending on the winning determination result. As a result, depending on which of the display images 003AKD0 to 003AKD4 the final display image is, the jackpot reliability and jackpot expectation, which are the reliability and expectation that are controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state, are different. More specifically, the determination result in which the final display image is the display image 003AKD0 is assigned a larger number of determination values when the winning determination result is “big hit” than when it is “big hit”. , It becomes easy to be determined when the winning determination result is other than "big hit". On the other hand, in the determination result that the final display image is the display image 003AKD4, when the winning determination result is “big hit”, more determination values are assigned than when the result is other than “big hit”, It becomes easy to be determined when the winning determination result is "big hit". Therefore, when the final display image is the display image 003AKD4, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the display image 003AKD0. With respect to the number of determination values assigned to the display image to be the final display image, similar comparison shows that when the final display image is the display image 003AKD4, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot are higher than when the final display image is the display image 003AKD3. Expectations are high. When the final display image is the display image 003AKD3, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the final display image is the display image 003AKD2. When the final display image is the display image 003AKD2, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the final display image is the display image 003AKD1. When the final display image is the display image 003AKD1, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are higher than when the display image 003AKD0.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process for the characteristic part 003AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop design or the like to be the fixed decorative design as the variable display result of the decorative design is determined (step 003AKS201). Based on the variable display content such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command, the effect control CPU 120 gives the final stop symbol. Just decide. The variation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are mainly due to the command transmission setting at the start of variation of the special symbol when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern designation command is an effect control command that designates the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating the variable display result determined by using the random number value for determining the special figure display result. As an example, "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probable change (big hit)", "probable change (big hit)" are included in the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result. I wish I had it.

If the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)", the variable display state of the decorative design does not reach the reach state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is It becomes "miss". When the variable display content is "reach (miss)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative pattern of the reach-miss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "miss". Becomes When the variable display content is "non-probable change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probable change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the sure change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)", the effect control CPU 120 finalizes different (non-matching) decorative patterns in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. CPU120 for production control extracts the numerical data showing the random number value for the left definite symbol determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for the production, etc., and stores the left definite symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM121. By referring to the determined decorative design, the left fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right fixed symbol which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, the right fixed decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined from the fixed decorative patterns. At this time, it may be determined such that the symbol number of the right confirmed decorative design is different from the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative design by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium fixed symbol determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. By the above, among the fixed decorative patterns, the medium fixed decorative pattern which is stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (miss)", the effect control CPU 120 finalizes the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R. To decide. The production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for left/right definite symbol determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for production, and stores the left/right definite symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same symbol numbers stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed together. decide. Furthermore, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium-decision symbol determination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter, is extracted, and the medium-determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, among the finalized decorative designs, the middle finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, in the case where the fixed decorative design is a big hit combination, for example, when the design number of the medium fixed decorative design is the same as the design number of the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design, an arbitrary value is set. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative design, the fixed decorative design may be a reach combination instead of a big hit combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative design, a difference (design difference) between the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design is determined, and the medium fixed decorative design corresponding to the design difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probable change (big hit)" or "probable change (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 causes the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At, the same (matching) decorative design is determined as the final stop design. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot confirmed symbol which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5, The decorative symbols having the same symbol numbers stopped and displayed in 5C and 5R are determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probable change (big hit)" or "probable change (big hit)", whether or not the big hit middle promotion effect is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number It suffices to determine which one of the decorative pattern shown) and the probability variation pattern (for example, a decorative pattern indicating an odd number) is the fixed decorative pattern. In the jackpot promotion promotion, after a combination of decorative patterns (non-probability variation jackpot combination) that reminds the jackpot in the image display device 5 but does not recall the probability variation state is temporarily displayed, the jackpot gaming state or the jackpot gaming state. Is an effect that informs whether or not the probability change state will occur at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a fixed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of normal designs. When it is determined that the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)" and the big hit middle promotion effect is not executed, a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation symbols. On the other hand, even if the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the big hit middle promotion effect, a fixed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of normal designs. With this, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed even if the probability variation patterns are collectively derived and displayed as the fixed decorative patterns, and do not give the player a feeling of distrust.

When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, in step 003AKS201, it is determined whether or not to execute the probable change promotion effect such as re-lottery effect or jackpot mid-promotion effect. May be broken. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative pattern of the non-probable variation big hit combination consisting of the same normal pattern is temporarily displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled in the probability variation state. The player can recognize that the decorative pattern is controlled to be in the probable state by displaying (decrease) the decorative pattern again and changing and displaying the decorative pattern of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic pattern. In addition, after the decorative design is changed again in the re-lottery effect, the decorative design of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed, so that the control in the probable variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 003AKS201 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

After determining the final stop symbol or the like in step 003AKS201, the pending display change determination process (step 003AKS202) and the specific effect determination process (step 003AKS203) are sequentially executed. Next, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step 003AKS204). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects any one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure effect control patterns) corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, and uses it as a use pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of effect control patterns (hold display change effect control patterns) prepared in correspondence with the execution setting of the hold display change by the hold display change determination processing of step 003AKS202, It may be set as a usage pattern. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (specific effect control patterns) corresponding to the execution setting of the specific effect by the specific effect determination processing of step 003AKS203, and sets it as a usage pattern. You may. In the specific effect determination process of step 003AKS203, execution setting of rank-up effect may be performed. In accordance with such a rank-up effect execution setting, one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (rank-up effect control pattern) may be selected and set as a usage pattern. It should be noted that the special figure change time production control pattern, the hold display change production control pattern, the specific production control pattern, and the rank-up production control pattern are not limited to those in which separate production control patterns are set, and combinations of execution settings for each production It is also possible to set one effect control pattern corresponding to.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step 003AKS204, for example, the initial stage of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (the effect control timer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 122 corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command. A value is set (step 003AKS205). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern is made on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 003AKS206). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern at the time of special figure change) determined in step 003AKS204 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, The variation of the decorative design may be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After setting the fluctuation start in step 003AKS206, the hold display such as the first hold display in the first hold display area 003AKB1 and the second hold display in the second hold display area 003AKB2 is corresponding to the start of the variable display. And the like are updated (step 003AKS207). For example, when the first special figure game is executed (started), in the first hold display area 003AKB1, the display part (right end display part) corresponding to the hold number “1” is moved to the active display area 003AKA1. (Shifting) and displaying as an active display, the first holding display in the display parts corresponding to the other holding numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. On the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed (started), in the second hold display area 003AKB2, the display area (left end display area) corresponding to the hold number “1” is moved to the active display area 003AKA1. (Shifting) and displaying as an active display, the second holding display in the display parts corresponding to other holding numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. The stored contents of the hold display data storage unit may be shifted in accordance with the shift of the hold display.

In addition, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are both “0”, when the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize, The setting for updating the active display in the active display area 003AKA1 may be performed without updating the 1-hold display or the second-hold display. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 has only to start the active display, which is a plain white color display in the active display area 003AKA1, as a normal display mode in the active display. After updating the hold display or the like in step 003AKS207, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect display during variable display (step 003AKS208), and then the variable display start setting processing is ended. ..

FIG. 8-9(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 003AKS202 of the variable display start setting process as the pending display change determination process. In the pending display change setting process, first, the stored contents of the pending display data are confirmed (step 003AKS301). The hold display data storage content is, for example, data indicating a winning determination result, a hold display image, a final display image, etc., which are stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with each of the hold numbers “1” to “4”. Is the content of. The hold display image is specified as the pre-change image displayed before the execution of the hold display change based on the hold display notice. Then, the presence/absence of a change in the pending display is determined (step 003AKS302). At this time, for example, based on the pre-change image, the final display image, and the like, either "changed" to execute the pending display change or "no change" to not execute the pending display change is determined. More specifically, the pre-change image and the final display image are compared, and if the pre-change image and the final display image are the same display image, it is determined that “no change” is performed without executing the pending display change. Good. When the pre-change image is a display image different from the final display image and the holding number is “1”, it may be determined to “change” for executing the holding display change. When the pre-change image is a display image different from the final display image and the holding number is not "1" (normal time), a random number value for holding display change determination is extracted and based on the random number value. Depending on the winning determination result specified in step 003AKS301, it is possible to determine either "changed" or "no change" by referring to the pending display change presence/absence determination table. Even when the pre-change image and the final display image are the same display image, the pending display notice can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and the display mode of the pending display does not change even if the notice effect is executed. You may do it. However, even in this case, when the final display image is the display image 003AKD4 (the display color is gold), the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation cannot be increased any further, so the pending display change is not executed. ".

Based on the determination result of step 003AKS302, it is determined whether "changed" is determined (step 003AKS303). When it is determined that there is no change instead of “there is a change” (step 003AKS303; No), the pending display change determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a change (step 003AKS303; Yes), it is determined whether the holding number is "1" (step 003AKS304). When it is determined that the holding number is not "1" (step 003AKS304; No), the holding display change pattern is determined by random number lottery (step 003AKS305). The hold display change pattern is an effect pattern in which the execution timing of the hold display change that is the notice of the hold display, the effect mode, and the like can be specified, and if a plurality of patterns are stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121, the hold display change pattern is prepared. Good. The CPU 120 for effect control extracts a random value for determining the pending display change pattern, and refers to the pending display change pattern determination table according to the pre-change image and the final display image specified in step 003AKS301 based on the random number value. By doing so, the hold display change pattern may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number is "1" (step 003AKS304; No), the hold display change pattern that changes from the pre-change image to the final display image is determined from the hold display change patterns. (Step 003AKS307). After that, the determination result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like (step 003AKS306), and the hold display change determination process is ended.

FIG. 8-9(B) shows a configuration example of the pending display change presence/absence determination table 003AKT5. In step 003AKS305 of the hold display change determination processing, when the pre-change image is a display image different from the final display image and the hold number is not "1" (normal time), the winning determination result is specified and the hold display is performed. It suffices to be able to determine the presence/absence of the pending display change by referring to the pending display change presence/absence determination table 003AKT5 based on the random number for determining the change. In the hold display change presence/absence determination table 003AKT5, the determination value, which is a numerical value that is compared with the random number value for hold display change determination, executes “no change” indicating that the hold display change is not executed according to the winning determination result. It may be assigned to the determination result of “changed”. The pending display change presence/absence determination table 003AKT5 is configured such that the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of “no change” or “changed” is different depending on the winning determination result. Thereby, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation degree are different depending on whether or not the hold display change is executed. In particular, when the winning determination result is “big hit”, more determination values are assigned to the determination result of “changed” than in the cases other than “big hit”, so the percentage of execution of the pending display change Becomes higher. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the held display for which the held display change is executed, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation degree are higher than those of the variable display corresponding to the held display that is not executed.

FIG. 8-10(A) shows an example of setting the hold display change pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a plurality of hold display change patterns, hold display change patterns 003AKE01 to 003AKE04, 003AKE12 to 003AKE14, 003AKE23, 003AKE24, 003AKE34 are prepared in advance. The plurality of hold display change patterns correspond to a combination of the hold display display image (before change image) before the hold display change is executed and the hold display display image (after change) after the hold display change is executed. ing. For example, the hold display change pattern 003AKE01 is used when the post-change image becomes the display image 003AKD1 due to the hold display change, when the pre-change image is the display image 003AKD0. It should be noted that as the hold display change pattern, a pattern for executing a goose effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change even if the hold display notice is executed may be prepared. Further, different hold display change patterns may be prepared according to the execution timing of the hold display change.

FIG. 8-10(B) shows a configuration example of the hold display change pattern determination table 003AKT6. In step 003AKS305 of the pending display change determination process, the pending display change pattern can be determined by referring to the pending display change pattern determination table 003AKT6 based on the pre-change image and the final display image. The pending display change pattern determination table 003AKT6 indicates that the determination value of the pending display change pattern is a determination value that is a numerical value that is compared with a random value for determining the pending display change pattern according to the combination of the pre-change image and the final display image. Be assigned to. In the pending display change pattern determination table 003AKT6, table data may be configured such that the pending display change pattern to which the determination value is assigned differs depending on the combination of the pre-change image and the final display image. As described above, when the display image 003AKD4 is the final display image among the display images 003AKD0 to 003AKD4, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are the highest, and the jackpot reliability increases as the display images 003AKD3, 003AKD2, and 003AKD1. When the display image 003AKD0 is the final display image, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation degree are the lowest. According to the structure of the table data in the hold display change pattern determination table 003AKT6, the hold display change pattern is changed to a display image having a higher jackpot reliability and a larger jackpot expectation than the display image that is the final display image. There is no. As a result, even if the pending display change is executed and the pending display changes to a display color with a high jackpot reliability or a big hit expectation degree, even if another pending display change is executed, the pending display still shows the jackpot reliability or the jackpot expectation. Since there is no fall of the display color to a low display color, it is possible to prevent the player's once-expected feeling from being impaired by the fall of the hold display.

FIG. 8-11(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 003AKS203 of the variable display start setting process as the specific effect determination process. In the specific effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the pending display change is executed corresponding to the variable display this time (step 003AKS401). The effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display change when a determination result for executing the hold display change (such as information indicating the hold display change pattern) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. It may be determined that "display change has occurred", and if such a determination result is not stored, "hold display change not performed" in which the hold display change is not executed. In the case of "no change in pending display" (step 003AKS401; No), the specific effect determination process ends.

In the case of "there is a change in the pending display" (step 003AKS401; Yes), the specific effect is being executed by determining whether or not the specific effect execution flag indicating that the specific effect is being executed is turned on. It is determined whether there is any (step 003AKS402). When it is determined that the specific effect is being executed (step 003AKS402; Yes), the specific effect determination process is ended. With such a configuration, when the specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other hold display is restricted from being executed.

When it is determined that the specific effect is not being executed (step 003AKS402; No), the presence or absence of the specific effect of whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the effect mode of the specific effect when the effect is executed are determined (step). 003AKS403). At this time, "no specific effect" is performed without performing the specific effect, "first effect mode" is performed in the first effect mode of the specific effect, "second effect mode" is performed in the second effect mode of the specific effect, Alternatively, it is determined to be one of the "third effect modes" in which the specific effect is executed in the third effect mode. The effect control CPU 120 extracts the random number value for determining the specific effect, and determines the presence or absence of the specific effect and the effect mode by referring to the specific effect determination table based on the random number value and depending on the winning determination result. do it. The effect control CPU 120 identifies the winning determination result by referring to the winning determination result stored in the pending display data storage unit in association with each of the pending numbers “1” to “4”. do it.

Based on the determination result of step 003AKS403, it is determined whether or not "there is a specific effect" is determined (step 003AKS404). Specifically, when it is determined in step 003AKS403 that any one of the "first effect mode", the "second effect mode" or the "third effect mode" is determined, it is determined that the "specific effect exists" is determined. Good. When it is determined that there is no specific effect (step 003AKS404; No), the specific effect determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that “there is a specific effect” (step 003AKS404; Yes), the presence/absence of the rank-up effect indicating whether or not the rank-up effect is to be executed and the rank-up effect pattern to be executed are determined. After the determination (step 003AKS405), the specific effect determination process ends. The rank-up effect pattern is an effect pattern capable of designating the effect mode of the rank-up effect, and a plurality of patterns may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 in advance and prepared. The effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number value for rank-up effect determination, and refers to the rank-up effect determination table according to the effect mode of the specific effect determined in step 003AKS403 based on the random value. Then, the presence/absence of the rank-up effect and the rank-up effect pattern may be determined. In addition, when it determines with "specific effect exists" (step 003AKS404; Yes), the above-mentioned specific effect execution flag is set to ON.

FIG. 8-11(B) shows a configuration example of the specific effect determination table 003AKT7. In step 003AKS403 of the specific effect determination process, the presence or absence of the specific effect and the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined by referring to the specific effect determination table 003AKT7 based on the winning determination result. In the specific effect determination table 003AKT7, the determination value that is a numerical value that is compared with the random number value for determining the specific effect according to the winning determination result is “no specific effect”, “first effect mode”, “second effect”. It suffices to be assigned to the determination results of “mode” and “third effect mode”. In the specific effect determination table 003AKT7, the table data is configured such that the effect mode to which the determination value is assigned varies depending on the winning determination result. Thereby, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation degree are different depending on which of the first presentation aspect, the second presentation aspect, and the third presentation aspect the production mode of the specific production. More specifically, when the specific effect is performed in the first effect mode, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation degree are lower than when the specific effect is performed in the second effect aspect. Further, when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation degree are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the third effect aspect. It should be noted that the allocation of the determination values shown in FIG. 8-11(B) is merely an example, and the determination values are such that the specific effect of the third effect mode is larger than the specific effect of the second effect mode. Can be assigned by an arbitrary method so that the specific effect of the second effect mode has a higher jackpot reliability and a higher jackpot expectation degree than the specific effect of the first effect aspect. For example, the determination value may be determined to be any of "no specific effect", "first effect mode", "second effect mode", and "third effect mode" at different ratios depending on conditions such as a game state. May be assigned.

FIG. 8-12(A) shows an example of setting the rank-up effect pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a rank-up effect pattern 003AKF13 and a rank-up effect pattern 003AKF23 are prepared in advance as a plurality of rank-up effect patterns. The plurality of rank-up effect patterns correspond to a combination of an effect mode of the specific effect before execution of the rank-up effect and an effect mode of the specific effect after execution of the rank-up effect. For example, it is used when the rank-up effect pattern 003AKF13 and the effect mode of the specific effect change from the first effect mode to the third effect mode. The rank-up effect pattern 003AKF23 is used when the effect mode of the specific effect changes from the second effect mode to the third effect mode. In the present embodiment, the rank-up effect pattern in which the effect mode of the specific effect changes from the first effect mode to the second effect mode is not set. With such a configuration, the production mode of the specific production in the rank-up production is restricted from changing from the first production mode to the second production mode. It should be noted that the rank-up effect is generated at any of a plurality of types of timings during variable display, including the timing at which the reach effect that is the super reach is executed, and the timing at which the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed as the pseudo continuous effect. Execution may be possible, and different rank-up effect patterns may be prepared depending on the execution timing of the rank-up effect. With such a configuration, by determining the rank-up effect pattern, the execution timing of the rank-up effect may be determined to be any one of a plurality of types of timings during variable display.

FIG. 8-12(B) shows a configuration example of the rank-up effect determination table 003AKT8. In step 003AKS405 of the specific effect determination process, the presence/absence of rank-up effect and rank-up effect pattern can be determined by referring to the rank-up effect determination table 003AKT8 based on the effect mode of the specific effect determined in step 003AKS403. It should be. In the rank-up effect determination table 003AKT8, according to the effect mode of the specific effect determined in step 003AKS403, the determination value that is a numerical value that is compared with the random value for rank-up effect determination does not execute the rank-up effect. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of "no up effect", "003AKF13" for executing the rank up effect in the rank up effect pattern 003AKF13, and "003AKF23" for executing the rank up effect in the rank up effect pattern 003AKF23. In the rank-up effect determination table 003AKT8, whether or not the rank-up effect is executed is assigned by assigning a different number of determination values to "no rank-up effect" depending on whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit. The jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation may be set differently depending on whether or not. Specifically, when the rank-up effect is executed, it may be set to control the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state at a higher rate than when the rank-up effect is not executed. According to such a configuration, even if the special effect is executed in a mode in which the jackpot reliability or the jackpot expectation is low before the rank-up effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is achieved by executing the rank-up effect. Since the degree of expectation or the jackpot expectation becomes high, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation and improve the enjoyment of the game.

FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic part 003AK. In the variable display effect production process, for example, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed (step 003AKS501). At this time, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display time is changed. It may be determined that the time has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 003AKS501; No), it is determined whether it is the hold display change period (step 003AKS502). The pending display change period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (such as the pending display change effect control pattern) determined in step 003AKS204 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is determined that the period is the hold display change period (step 003AKS502; Yes), the control for executing the hold display change in the hold display notice is performed (step 003AKS503).

When it is not the hold display change period (step 003AKS502; No), after performing the control by step 003AKS503, it is determined whether it is the specific effect period (step 003AKS504). The specific effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (such as the specific effect control pattern) determined in step 003AKS204 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is determined that it is the specific effect period (step 003AKS504; Yes), control for executing the specific effect is performed (step 003AKS505). It suffices that the specific effect can be executed in one of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode by performing the control by step 003AKS505. The specific effect execution flag described above is cleared when the specific effect is executed under the control of step 003AKS 505 and ends.

If it is not the specific effect period (step 003AKS 504; No), after the control by step 003AKS 505, it is determined whether it is the reach effect period (step 003AKS 506). The reach production period may be set in advance in, for example, the production control pattern (such as the special figure variation production control pattern) determined according to the variation pattern in step 003AKS204 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 003AKS506; Yes), control for executing the reach effect is performed (step 003AKS507). When it is not the reach production period (step 003AKS506; No), after performing the control by step 003AKS507, for example, based on the setting in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, the decoration pattern is changed. After performing the control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step 003AKS508), the effect during the variable display is finished.

When it is determined in step 003AKS501 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 003AKS501; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol finalization command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 003AKS509). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 003AKS509; No), the variable display effect production process is terminated and stands by. After the variable display time has elapsed, if the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may do it.

When the design confirmation command is received (step 003AKS509; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, which is the final display result in the variable display of the decorative design. The control for derivation display as the stop display of the stop design (fixed decorative design) is performed (step 003AKS510). At this time, a predetermined time is set as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step 003AKS511). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step 003AKS512), the variable display effect process is ended.

Next, an example of the production operation of the specific production will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8-14 shows an example of the effect operation when the rank-up effect is executed according to the rank-up effect pattern 003AKF13 in the specific effect.

8-14(A), the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and the active display is performed. In the area 003AKA1, the active display is shown as a round plain white display (display image 003AKD0) which is a normal display mode. In the state shown in FIG. 8-14(A), both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 are turned off. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 8-14(A), in the first hold display area 003AKB1, the hold display is displayed in each of the display parts corresponding to the hold numbers “1” to “4”, respectively. The round solid white display (display image 003AKD0) is displayed. In the second hold display area 003AKB2, hold display is not performed.

In this state, when the hold display change period comes, the hold display change is executed. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 8-14(B), the hold display displayed in the display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” in the first hold display area 003AKB1 is changed to the normal display mode due to the change of the hold display. From the case, the case of changing from the circular solid color red display (display image 003AKD3) will be described as an example. In the example shown in FIG. 8-14(B), in response to this change in the hold display, a specific effect related to the hold display displayed in the display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” in the first hold display area 003AKB1. Is started in the first effect mode, and only the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 of the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emits light.

Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 8-14(C), in a state where the specific effect related to the hold display displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” in the first hold display area 003AKB1 is being executed. , The pending display change is executed, and the pending display displayed in the display portion corresponding to the pending number “4” in the first pending display area 003AKB1 is changed from the normal display mode to a circular solid blue display (display image The case of changing to 003KAD1) will be described as an example. In the state shown in FIG. 8-14(C), a hold display notice that is an effect related to the hold display displayed on the display part corresponding to the hold number “1” and a display part corresponding to the hold number “2”. The hold display notice, which is an effect related to the hold display displayed in, is executed in the same period. As shown in FIG. 8-14(C), since the specific effect related to the hold display displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” in the first hold display area 003AKB1 is being executed, the first The specific effect related to the hold display displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number “4” in the hold display area 003AKB1 is not executed.

Then, in FIGS. 8-14(A) to 8-14(C), the variable display corresponding to the hold display displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” in the first hold display area 003AKB1 is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14(D), an active display in the same display mode (circular solid color red display) as the hold display is displayed in the active display area 003AKA1, and the hold display is erased. Then, the first hold display other than the hold display moves to the right.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-14(E), the rank-up effect is executed according to the rank-up effect pattern 003AKF13, and the effect mode of the specific effect changes from the first mode to the third mode. As a result, both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emit light. That is, the specific effect related to the hold display displayed in the display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” of the first hold display area 003AKB1, which is started in the first effect mode in FIG. 8-14(B), is: As shown in FIG. 8-14(D), it continues even after the variable display corresponding to the hold display is started, and as shown in FIG. Change to 3 production mode.

As described above, in the characteristic part 003AK, the hold display can be displayed as the specific display for notifying the opportunity of giving the game value advantageous to the player, and the specific effect is displayed in association with the hold display which is the specific display. It is configured to be executable. The specific effect is executed using at least one of the first light emitting section 003AKC1 as the first effecting means and the second light emitting section 003AKC2 as the second effecting means. Specifically, the specific effect is a first effect mode in which only the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 of the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emits (uses), and the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit. 003AKC2, a second effect mode in which only the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 emits light, and a third effect mode using both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2. To be executed. The jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation differ depending on which of the first, second, and third rendering modes the particular rendering is performed (the jackpot as an advantageous state at different ratios). Controlled to the gaming state). When the specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to another hold display is restricted from being executed (in the specific effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-11, the specific effect is executed. When it is determined that it is in progress (step 003AKS402; Yes), the specific effect determination process is ended). Thereby, as the specific effect related to one specific display, one of the specific effect of the first effect mode using only the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the specific effect of the second effect mode using only the second light emitting unit 003AKC2. When one is being executed, as the specific effect related to the other specific display, the other of the specific effect of the first effect mode and the specific effect of the second effect mode is restricted from being executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing which hold display (specific display) the particular effect is associated with, which lowers the interest in the game.

Further, the characteristic part 003AK is configured to be able to execute a plurality of holding display notices, which are effects related to the holding display as the specific display, in the same period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that there are a plurality of opportunities for giving a game value that is advantageous to the player, by the hold display, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the characteristic part 003AK, when the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation degree are lower than in the case where the specific effect is executed in the second effect aspect (the advantageous state at a low rate. As a big hit game state is controlled). Further, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 as the first effect means is provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared with the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 as the second effect unit. According to such a configuration, the specific effect of the first effect mode, which has a low jackpot reliability or a high expectation of hit compared to the specific effect of the second effect aspect, is used in the specific effect of the second effect aspect. Since the game is executed using the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 which is more easily recognized by the player than the 003AKC2, the interest of the game is improved and the player's attention can be favorably gathered.

Further, in the characteristic part 003AK, the specific effect related to the one hold display can be started before the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started, and can be continued even after the variable display is started. In addition, it is configured to be able to perform a rank-up effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect from one effect mode to another effect mode having a higher jackpot reliability or a higher jackpot expectation degree than the one effect aspect. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the characteristic part 003AK, in the rank-up effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is limited so as not to change from the first effect mode to the second effect mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing which hold display the specific effect is related to, and to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, and is shown in the above-mentioned embodiment so that at least one problem in the conventional technique can be solved. It may have a part of the configuration.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the specific effect related to one hold display (specific display) is being executed, the specific effect related to the other hold display is not executed. However, this is only an example, and when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, at least until the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is finished, a specification related to another hold display is performed. You may restrict so that production is not executed. Specifically, when the display mode of another hold display changes due to the hold display change while the specific effect related to the one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other hold display is The variable display corresponding to the one hold display may not be executed until the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is ended, and the variable display may be restricted to be executed at a predetermined timing after the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is ended. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing which hold display the particular effect is associated with and lowering the entertainment level of the game. Both the special effect related to the hold display can be executed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed in one effect mode, a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree lower than the one effect mode related to another hold display. While the specific effect of, is limited so as not to be executed, the specific effect of the effect mode that is related to the other hold display and has a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation higher than the one effect mode is performed. Good. Specifically, when the specific effect related to the one hold display is being executed in the one effect mode, the specific effect related to the other hold display is set to be larger than the one effect mode. When it is determined to execute in another effect mode with high expectation, the specific effect related to the one hold display is stopped, and the specific effect related to the other hold display is changed to the other effect mode. It should be executed in. According to such a configuration, even during the execution of the specific effect related to one hold display, a specific effect that is related to another hold display and has a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation higher than the specified effect being executed. It can be executed and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the specific effect is not executed when the hold display change is not executed. However, this is merely an example, and even when the hold display change is not executed, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the hold display change is not executed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the specific effect related to the one hold display is described as being executed at the timing when the display mode of the one hold display changes due to the change in the hold display. However, this is merely an example, and the specific effect can be executed at any timing. For example, the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the game ball enters the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Alternatively, the specific effect is changed to an active display by moving (shifting) one of the pending displays that has been displayed when the new first special drawing game or the second special drawing game is started to the active display area 003AKA1. You may make it perform at the timing when it is displayed and another hold display is shifted.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the hold display is displayed as the specific display for notifying the opportunity of giving the game value advantageous to the player has been described. However, this is merely an example, and an arbitrary display for notifying the opportunity of giving a game value advantageous to the player can be displayed as the specific display. For example, the active display may be displayed as the specific display. Alternatively, it is executed over a plurality of times of variable display (variable display of the number of chances), and a continuous production that suggests the possibility of giving a game value advantageous to the player (for example, control to a jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state). May be configured to be executable, and an icon indicating the number of times of variable display (number of chances) executed during the continuous effect may be displayed as the specific display. Alternatively, an icon indicating the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot gaming state may be displayed as a specific display.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, and a part thereof may be applied to another gaming machine such as a slot machine. Inside the housing of the slot machine, there is provided a variable display device in which a plurality of (for example, three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. Further, the front door of the slot machine is provided with an image display device having the same display function as the image display device 5 in the above-mentioned embodiment. On the outer peripheral portion of each reel, for example, a plurality of types of patterns that can be distinguished from each other, such as "red 7", "white 7", "BAR", "JAC", "watermelon", "cherry", "bell" They are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portion of each reel are displayed on the upper, lower, middle and upper three rows on the variable display device. By rotating each reel in response to a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the start lever, the symbols on each reel are displayed while being continuously changed. Then, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, the player operates a plurality of stop switches installed corresponding to each reel. The rotation of the reel may be automatically stopped when the stop switch is not operated even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the rotation of the reel is started.

At a predetermined position of the front door of the slot machine, for example, an insertion slot into which a game medium such as a medal can be inserted, and a BET switch for setting (BET) the bet number for each one unit (for example, one medal) of the game medium. MAXBET switch for setting the maximum number of units that can be bet in one game (for example, three medals), and stored as credits (the number of game media stored as the gaming value owned by the player) There is provided a settlement switch and the like for settlement of the game medium used and the game medium used for setting the bet number.

When playing a game in a slot machine, first, a game medium is inserted through an insertion slot or a bet number is set by using credits. When using credits, the BET switch or the MAXBET switch is operated. When the number of bets is set in this way, one of the plurality of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets becomes effective, the operation of the start lever becomes effective, that is, the state where the game can be executed, and the variable display The execution condition is satisfied. When a winning of a re-play combination such as a replay occurs in the previous game, the next game can be continuously executed, and the variable display execution condition is satisfied. When the start lever is operated in a state in which the game can be executed in this manner, each reel rotates in response to the start condition of the variable display being satisfied, and the symbols continuously change. While the symbols are changing due to the rotation of each reel, various effect operations are executed by the effect image display operation on the image display device, the sound output operation from the speaker, the game effect lamp lighting operation, and the like. For example, in the image display device, the same symbol as the symbol drawn on the outer peripheral portion of each reel, or a symbol that is different from the symbol of each reel but is associated with the symbol is variably displayed as production identification information. Just do it. Further, after the variation of the symbols is finished, various effect operations such as effect operation for notifying the occurrence of winning and effect operation for demonstration may be executed. When any one of the plurality of stop switches is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped, and the display result is visually displayed in a derived manner.

Then, when one reel is completed by stopping the rotation of all reels, and a combination of symbols called a predetermined winning combination is stopped as a display result of each reel on any activated pay line. Will be awarded. The types of winning prizes are roughly classified into small ones accompanied by awarding of medals, a re-playing player who can start the next game without setting the bet number, and a special game accompanied by a transition of the game state. There is a winning combination, and winning winning combinations are defined according to the gaming state. In the slot machine, at the timing when the start lever is operated, based on the random number value extracted from the random number circuit similar to the random number circuit 509 in the above-described embodiment, the winning of each winning combination determined according to the gaming state is generated. Perform an internal lottery to decide whether to allow or not. The fact that winning of this internal lottery and winning of the winning is allowed is also called “internal winning”. Of the winnings of each role, the winning of the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game for which the winning is determined, but the winning of the special role includes all the roles that are allowed to occur by the internal lottery. Is valid until. That is, once the winning of the special part is permitted, even if the winning of the special part cannot be generated in each game, the winning is carried over to the next game.

The gaming state in the slot machine includes a specific gaming state and a normal gaming state. The specific game state may include AT (assist time), CT (challenge time), RT (replay time), ART (assist replay time), and the like in addition to the regular bonus and the big bonus. In the regular bonus game state, for example, small winning combinations such as JAC, cherry, watermelon, and bell are defined as winning winning combinations, and are targeted for the lottery in the internal lottery. In the game state of the big bonus, a small role such as cherry, watermelon and bell, and a special role such as regular bonus (or JACIN) are defined as winning roles in a predetermined small role game, It is a target of lottery in the internal lottery in each small role game. In the game state of AT, the winning condition of a specific winning combination, in which a winning cannot appear unless an operation that matches the winning condition such as the stop order or stop timing of each reel, is notified. In the gaming state of CT, each reel is uncontrolled within a certain range, so that it is possible to win a specific small winning combination. In the RT game state, a replay role such as a replay wins with a high probability. In the ART gaming state, the AT gaming state and the RT gaming state are combined. In the normal gaming state, for example, small roles such as cherry, watermelon, and bell, re-playing roles such as replay, and special roles such as big bonus and regular bonus are determined in advance as winning winning roles. It is targeted for lottery in the internal lottery.

In this case, an icon indicating the number of times the start lever can be effectively operated may be displayed as the specific display.

In the above-described embodiment, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 that is the first effecting device is described as being provided more easily to be recognized by the player than the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 that is the second effecting device. However, this is merely an example, and the first effect means and the second effect means may be as easily recognized by the player as each other.

In the above-described embodiment, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 that is the first effect means is provided on the game board 2 so that the player can recognize the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 more easily than the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 that is the second effect unit. I explained that. However, this is merely an example, and the first effect means can be provided by an arbitrary method so as to be more easily recognized by the player than the second effect means.

For example, the first effect means may be provided closer to the configuration that the player pays attention to during the game than the second effect means, so that the player can recognize the first effect means more easily than the second effect means. With such a configuration, the player's line of sight is more likely to be guided to the first effect means than the second effect means, and the first effect means is more easily recognized by the player than the second effect means. As a specific example of the configuration that the player pays attention to during the game, the first starting opening, the second starting opening, the speakers 8L and 8R, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the operating means (for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, etc.). ), a vibrating means, a blower opening for blowing out air, and the like.

Alternatively, the first effect means is provided in a position where it is not shielded by a predetermined member and visible to the player in both the first state and the second state, while the second effect means is provided in the first state. In the second state, the first effect means is provided at a position where the player is not shielded by the predetermined member and cannot be visually recognized, and in the second state, the player is visually shielded by the predetermined member. It may be provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared with the effect means. With such a configuration, the first effect means recognized by the player in both the first state and the second state is not recognized by the player in the first state, and is recognized by the player only in the second state. It is easier for the player to recognize than the recognized second effect means. Therefore, the first effect means is more easily recognized by the player than the second effect means. For example, a first lamp is provided as a first effect means and a second lamp is provided as a second effect means, and the first lamp as the first effect means is a movable member effect using a movable member. In one of the state (first state) and the state in which the movable member effect is being executed (second state), the position is not shielded by the movable member (predetermined member) and is provided at a position visible to the player. The second lamp as the second effect means is shielded by the movable member in a state where the movable member effect is not executed and cannot be visually recognized by the player, and is not detected in a state where the movable member effect is executed. It may be provided at a position that is not shielded by the movable member and is visible to the player. Alternatively, a first movable member is provided as the first effecting means, and a second movable member is provided as the second effecting means, and the first movable member as the first effecting means is moved to the second movable member using the second movable member. The player is not shielded by the game board 2 (predetermined member) in both the state (first state) in which the member effect is not executed and the state (second state) in which the second movable member effect is executed. On the other hand, the second movable member as the second effect means is shielded by the game board 2 in a state where the second movable member effect is not executed, and cannot be visually recognized by the player. In the state where the movable member effect is being executed, it may be provided at a position where it is not shielded by the game board 2 and is visible to the player.

In the above-described embodiment, the first rendering means is the first light emitting unit 003AKC1, and the second rendering unit is the second light emitting unit 003AKC2. However, this is merely an example, and the first effect means and the second effect means are for displaying an image, outputting a sound, lighting a lamp (for example, a 7-segment LED), operating a role, or a combination thereof. It is only necessary to be able to suggest the rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state by any method. For example, the first effect means and the second effect means may execute the specific effect by displaying an image on the image display device 5.

In the case where the specific effect is executed by a combination of image display, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of a role object, etc., when the specific effect related to one hold display is executed, It is also possible to limit the execution of only a part of the specific effect related to the hold display of. For example, when a specific effect is executed by a combination of image display, sound output, and lamp lighting, when a specific effect related to one hold display is executed, it is related to another hold display. Of the specific effects, the display of the image and the output of the sound may be executed, but the lighting of the lamp may not be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 that is the first effecting device is provided in the game board 2, and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 that is the second effecting device is provided in the gaming machine frame 3. However, this is only an example, and both the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 and the second light emitting unit 003AKC2 may be provided on the game board 2. Further, one of the first effect means and the second effect means may be a movable member (feature).

In the above-described embodiment, the rank-up effect is executed while the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is being executed, and the effect mode of the specific effect related to the one hold display is changed. However, this is just an example, and the rank-up effect is executed before the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started to change the effect mode of the specific effect related to the one hold display. Good.

In the above-described embodiment, while the specific effect related to the one hold display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other hold display is restricted from being executed, while the specific effect related to the one hold display is performed. It has been described that the pending display notice related to other pending displays is not limited even when is executed. However, this is merely an example, and when the specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, the hold display notice related to another hold display may not be executed.

In the above embodiment, in the rank-up effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is limited so as not to change from the first effect mode to the second effect mode. However, this is only an example, and in the rank-up effect, the effect mode of the specific effect may be changeable from the first effect mode to the second effect mode. In addition, in the case of changing the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode in the rank-up effect, it is preferable to configure so that the correspondence relationship between the hold display and the specific effect becomes clear. As a specific example of the configuration in which the correspondence relationship between the hold display and the specific effect becomes clear, in the case where an effect for displaying an image on the image display device 5 is executed as the specific effect, the specification is performed corresponding to the execution of the specific effect. An example is a configuration in which an effect image showing how the image related to the effect and the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 related to the specific effect interact with each other is displayed on the image display device 5. Alternatively, when performing an effect of causing at least one of the plurality of lamps to emit light as the specific effect, the respective lamps are arranged so that the correspondence relationship with each of the hold displays displayed on the image display device 5 is clear. (For example, it is arranged directly above each corresponding pending display). According to these configurations, since the relationship between the hold display and the specific effect is clear, even if the effect mode of the specific effect in the rank-up effect is changed from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, the specific effect is not affected. There is no possibility that the player may misunderstand whether or not the game is related to the hold display and the interest in the game is deteriorated.

In the above-described embodiment, it is assumed that the hold display change determination process shown in FIG. 8-9 and the specific effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-11 are executed in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of the effect control process process. did. However, this is merely an example, and the hold display change determination process and the specific effect determination process may be executed in the prereading notice setting process of step S161 of the effect control process process. Specifically, in the pre-reading notice setting process, by executing the hold display change determination process based on the start winning a prize transmitted from the main board 11, the presence or absence of the hold display change, the effect pattern of the hold display change, etc. It is only necessary to determine the production mode of the pending display change and execute the specific production determination process based on the determination result to determine the presence or absence of the specific production and the production mode of the specific production such as the production pattern of the specific production. .. For example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, the execution timing and effect pattern of the pending display change may be determined, and the execution timing and effect pattern of the specific effect may be determined according to the determination result. With such a configuration, by executing the specific effect at the execution timing and effect pattern corresponding to the execution timing of the hold display change and the effect pattern, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the specific effect has been described as an effect that suggests the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the advantageous state. However, this is only an example, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3), and the set value can be set to the set value. It may be configured such that the game can be advanced so that the degree of advantage for the player is different, and the set value set is suggested by the above-described specific effect. As configurations related to setting of setting values and suggestion of setting values, respective configurations related to characteristic portions 112IW, 248F to 250F, 109AK, and 110AK described later may be adopted.

Any part or all of the configurations described above can be combined with each other by any method.

Each configuration related to the characteristic part 003AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other characteristic part. The feature parts combined in this way or the individual feature parts that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to other feature parts.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 003AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 003AK,
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (such as a big hit gaming state),
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step S161),
Specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect in association with the specific display displayed by the specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step 003AKS203),
Equipped with
The specific rendering means includes a first rendering means (for example, a first light emitting unit 003AKC1) and a second rendering unit (for example, a second light emitting unit 003AKC2),
Depending on the ratio controlled to the advantageous state, as the specific effect, a first specific effect using only the first effect means of the first effect means and the second effect means (for example, in the first effect mode) Specific effect), a second specific effect that uses only the second effect means of the first effect means and the second effect means (for example, a specific effect in the second effect mode), and the first effect means. And a third specific effect (for example, a specific effect in the third effect mode) that uses both the second effect means and the second effect means,
As one of the first specific effect and the second specific effect, as the specific effect related to the one specific display, as the specific effect related to another specific display, Restricting execution of the other of the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed in the specific effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-11 ( Step 003AKS402; Yes), the specific effect determination process is terminated),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing which particular display the particular effect is associated with, which lowers the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1) related to the characteristic part 003AK,
It is possible to execute a plurality of effects related to the specific display displayed by the specific display means (for example, a preliminary display notice) in the same period.
You may do it.
With such a configuration, it is possible to show that there are a plurality of opportunities for giving a game value that is advantageous to the player, by the specific display, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, which is related to the characteristic part 003AK,
When the specific effect related to the one specific display is being executed, the specific effect related to the other specific display is not executed until at least the variable display corresponding to the one specific display ends. (For example, when a specific effect related to one hold display is being executed, a specific effect related to another hold display is executed at a predetermined timing after the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is finished. To limit),
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing which particular display the particular effect is associated with, which lowers the interest of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above relating to the characteristic part 003AK,
When the first specific effect is executed as the specific effect, it is controlled to the advantageous state at a lower rate than when the second specific effect is executed as the specific effect (for example, the specific effect in the first effect mode). When executed, the jackpot reliability and the jackpot expectation are lower than when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode),
The first effect means is provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared to the second effect means (for example, the first light emitting unit 003AKC1 is provided so as to be easily recognized by the player as compared with the second light emitting unit 003AKC2),
You may do it.
With such a configuration, the player's attention can be favorably gathered.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4) related to the characteristic part 003AK,
The specific effect related to the one specific display is started before the variable display corresponding to the one specific display is started, and can be continued even after the variable display is started (for example, The specific effect related to the one hold display is started before the variable display corresponding to the one hold display is started, and can be continued even after the variable display is started),
It is possible to change the effect mode of the specific effect from one effect mode to another effect mode indicating that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the one effect mode (for example, rank-up effect can be executed. Is),
You may do it.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 112IW)
Next, the characteristic part 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface. The glass door frame 112IW003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game hall into the lock and unlocking it, and a player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) described later in the setting change state, are set. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switch main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, is housed in the substrate case 112IW201 together with the main substrate 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, the setting key 112IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch that can execute an ON/OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic part 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be combined.

Further, a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged on the board case 112IW201. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged on the front surface of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 is invisible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back surface side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic part 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the characteristic part 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, a board including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting switch 112IW052 at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. The security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. By doing so, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 become inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating, the covering state by the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes an operable state.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 112IW, the operation of the operation portion including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is restricted by the security cover 112IW500A when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. While the state is maintained, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A described above is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall or the like opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or cell plate is inserted between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or the like installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the setting value by operating the setting switch 112IW052 or the setting switch 112IW052 is performed, so the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch by the security cover 112IW500A in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted, it is possible to suitably suppress the illegal act.

Further, even when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the security cover 112IW500A covers the right side of the back of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, the security cover 112IW500A allows the substrate to pass through. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 and the like on the main board 11 are mounted and the seal and the like.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature part 112IW, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-4(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-4(B), and FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), misalignment shown in FIG. 9-6 A fluctuation pattern determination table, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a general pattern variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot (ball-out rate) is changed. .. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, and 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, 3 the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually increases.

(Display result judgment table)
9-4(A) to 9(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set value is “2” or “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. You win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change) than in some cases. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability (1/300 when non-probable change, 1/30 when probable change) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in the non-probable variation, 1/28 in the probable variation) than in the case of "2". Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when non-probable variation, 1/28 when probable variation) To do.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (C). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

Further, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the fact that the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation is applied. If it is the number of terminations, the probability change continuation rate (rate of continuous vacation) may be increased in the order of set value “1”<set value “2”<set value “3”.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 9-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the feature section 112IW, when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination, the jackpot type among jackpot type A to jackpot type C. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5(A), a determination value corresponding to a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned for each set value, but for simplification of description, assignment is made. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-7, which will be described later, are actually assigned with the determination value corresponding to the random number. For simplification, the percentage of the assigned decision value is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-5(A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the percentage determined as the jackpot type B is high and the setting value is “3”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the present feature portion 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5(B). In the present feature portion 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big hit game state is started after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period during which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot opening post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the effect control board 12 side is finished, Is a period during which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period of time.

As shown in FIG. 9-5(B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the big hit type A, the longest in the big hit type B, and the longest in the big hit type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determination as the jackpot type C is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the setting value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1"<"2"<"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

In this feature section 112IW, during the big hit game, it is configured to be able to execute a big hit medium suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value, but this big hit medium suggestion effect is performed in the fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. Further, by directing the interest of the player to the suggestive effect during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, common effects may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set to be longer, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set are selected in the descending order of the big hit type A<B<C. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In any one of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the big hit game state are performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present characteristic part 112IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a particular big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called condominium state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. In the present characteristic part 112IW, the jackpot rate is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. The rate (rate of consecutive holidays) may be different.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.) It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, and the number of controls are different for each big hit type, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

In the characteristic unit 112IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C at different rates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the case has been shown in which the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different depending on the type of big hit, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending are not limited to the type of big hit. The period may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the set value may be uniformly determined depending on which of the set values is “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3”, the lottery process is performed with the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

As described above, in the characteristic part 112IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. ..

In addition, in the feature part 112IW, the big hit type is determined using the random number MR2 which is a big hit type determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the big hit probability increases, the big hit type C as the big hit type becomes easy to be determined, etc.). Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the game nature itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and a game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game varies depending on the big hit type When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is specially variable during high base (during time saving control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which a big hit game state is controlled based on passing a predetermined count switch provided in the winning ball device 7. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same in playability as 1 to 3, the jackpot probability is higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3, while the jackpot is being played. The number of award balls that can be acquired may be set to a small number (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball is It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch).

(Variation pattern determination table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is “big hit” and the variation display result is “missed”. A loss variation pattern determination table used when determined in advance is prepared in advance.

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 112IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( In the following, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and different loss variation pattern determination tables are used.

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6(A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 9-6(B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 112IW, the period from the time the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, a real time clock or the like may be used to set a special period in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

In the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) and 9(B), both normal reach loss and super reach loss occur in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, and therefore the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6(A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6(B), and further has a set value. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of performing normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns involving super-reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or the difference between special periods and non-special periods). You may do it. By doing so, the execution ratio differs only in a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

In addition, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6(A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” (this example). Then, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6B shows the normal reach loss in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value. This is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set value, and The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different according to the set value.

In the feature section 112IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6A and 9B is used. Then, the variable display of the effect design is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 and variable display of effect symbols is performed. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

Not limited to the example of the characteristic part 112IW, for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a setting value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the effect design is different from the normal pattern, and the setting value is 1 or 2) May be selected) to allow the special variation pattern to be selected only during the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period and enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach lost variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In the feature part 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined as non-reach-loss variation, the non-reach-loss variation A to C is further determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, in the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6, non-reach loss A to C is included, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss is detected. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

As shown in FIG. 9-7, in the non-reach-miss-variation variation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the rate determined as non-reach-miss variation C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". If the set value is “3”, the rate determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, and thus the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In the feature part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1"<"2"<"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

In the feature part 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different by varying the proportion of the non-reach loses A to C different in the variation time according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time for the display of the effect symbol to be swayed or the high-speed variation display is made different so that the effect of the production etc. It is desirable that there be no difference in how they look.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, according to the set value, the final effect design (final The period in which the stop pattern) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the final effect symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration but is set for each set value. The fixed time may be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is higher.

The characteristic part 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening, which has a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided that is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). Then, this shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the characteristic part 112IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Note that, regardless of the configuration of the characteristic unit 112IW, the variation time period for shortening, which is used when the number of held storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, may be varied according to the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In the feature section 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (big winning opening, second winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform totaling, and to calculate various winning information such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base based on the totaling.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a 4-digit display unit. The display portion of each digit is made up of 7 segments, each of which is composed of 7 segments that draw the shape of "8", and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments.

The display contents are displayed on the first digit display part and the second digit display part, and the numerical values are displayed in percentage on the third digit display part and the fourth digit display part. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

Here, the short term means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole in the high base state and the number of prize balls from the prize hole in the big winning game state to the total number of prize balls. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” is displayed on the first digit display and the second-digit display, and when the short-term ratio of display No2 is displayed, “Y7.” is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third digit display part and the fourth digit display part. When is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." is displayed on the first digit display part and the second digit display part, and when the total cumulative ratio of display no. 4 is displayed. "A7." is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. When the total cumulative total ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display part and the fourth digit display part. When the cumulative combination ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

When the display No. 5 base 1 is displayed, “bL.” is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and when the display No. 4 base 2 is displayed, one digit is displayed. “B6.” is displayed on the display portion of the eye and the display portion of the second digit. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. When it is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

Further, the display of the short-term serial ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative serial ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, regarding the set value set at that time. It is possible to sequentially change the display to short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be capable of displaying only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of these continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, a form in which the consecutive ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, is calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display the history of the awarded prize balls on the display monitor 112IW029 without calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

(Setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW will be described. 9-8 and 9-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the characteristic part 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001 and S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the production control means for measuring the time until the production control means (specifically, the production control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means start waiting timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means start waiting timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 112IWS006 is executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting value change and confirmation, RAM initialization and restoration processing, etc. are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command at the time of restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103, for example, sets a factory-shipped setting flag in the RAM 102 that indicates that the factory-shipped settings are retained (for example, this flag is cleared even when RAM clearing processes 1 and 2 and a recovery process described later are executed. Is set, and is cleared when the setting change processing described later is executed) is set, and in step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. Note that, without being limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the factory default setting is left (for example, “0” or “−”) is set, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. It may be possible to confirm whether or not the value remains at the factory default value. If the settings at the time of factory shipment remain the same (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 112IWS008). In step 112IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting change flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, a display of "E").

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance ratio such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is displayed. Information is retained without being cleared. In addition, in the RAM clear 1 process, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (N in step 112IWS011), the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), and the output signal from the clear switch is off ( In (N) of step 112IWS013, the process does not move to step 112IWS014 but moves to the loop process.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S014, in the feature unit 112IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in step 112IWS007, S008), the setting for factory shipment is still left (step 112IWS006 Y), if power is cut off during setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open. The RAM is cleared on the condition that it is possible to change the set value after step 112IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting change flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). On the production control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation processing start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Sound is emitted, or a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply by the same process as step S6. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S6. Thus, a recovery process (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped is performed. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Further, the CPU 103 transmits the effect control command for instructing the recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the serial ratio and Information for performance display such as winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are retained without being cleared. In the game control main processing shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, when it is determined that the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the RAM clear processing (RAM clear 2 processing) is immediately executed. However, when it is determined that the output signal from the clear switch is ON, a flag indicating that the clear switch is ON is set in advance, and processing required at startup (door opening sensor 112IW090 or setting key) is performed. 112IW051 confirmation, setting confirmation processing, setting change processing, etc.) and then whether or not the flag is set, and if so, RAM clear processing may be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 112IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating that the setting change process is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). On the production control board 12 side, when the setting change processing start command is received, control is performed to inform that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Sound is emitted, or a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

When the setting change process ends, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). In addition, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S9. Thus, an effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS033). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

In this characteristic part 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 9-10(A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on.

If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation error processing (step 112IWSA04). Then, after that, the processing shifts to loop processing. In addition, in step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that there is a setting confirmation error, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the side of the production control CPU 120. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error process is executed, the process shifts to the loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process is ended.

Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 9-10(B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to “2”, and “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029. Updates the display on the display monitor 112IW029 to “3” and displays the display monitor 112IW0.
When “3” is displayed as the set value on 29, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to “1”. Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processing of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). Then, after that, the processing shifts to loop processing. In addition, in step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that there is a setting change error and execute the setting change error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the process shifts to the loop process so that the error state is continued and the process does not proceed until the power is turned on again. In this case, since the setting change flag remains set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y in step 112IWS009, 112IWS014). The error condition will be released.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

Note that the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5 in step 112IWSA01 of the setting confirmation process. Further, in 112IWSB01 of the setting change process, the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed using the image display device 5.

In addition, during execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-10, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are not displayed in the normal game (for example, all segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). Mode). In this way, by using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B to notify, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may have different modes in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

Further, if the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process shown in FIG. 9-10, the setting change process is executed again and the updated set value is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM). An error may be generated unless the setting change is completed by. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, the setting change flag (which is not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM that stores the setting value, and the setting change is completed at the end of the setting change process. When the flag is turned off and the process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process) is executed and the setting change flag is on, an error occurs. As described above, in a situation in which the setting change process does not normally proceed on the way, the clerk at the game hall may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though the setting change has not been completed. In such a case, if the setting change is not completed, an error is generated, so that the setting change can be surely completed.

Further, in step 112IWSA01 and step 112IWSB01 of FIG. 9-10, the current setting value is read from the backup RAM and the setting value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not normally performed, the information indicating the error is displayed on the image display device 5, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are different from those in the normal game. (For example, all segments of the 7-segment LED may be turned off, and if all lights are on during the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, all blinks may be performed).

FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the clear switch is turned on when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on). If so, the setting change process (steps 112IWS005 to S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 112IWS015 to S017) is executed. When the setting key 112IW051 is turned off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-12(A) and 9-12(B), when the power is turned off (power is cut) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. In addition, at the timing of turning off the power, when the big winning opening such as a big hit game is open, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12(C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 under the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In this manner, in the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. 9-12(D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by the clerk at the game hall. Numerical values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, such as 1→2→3→1→... ).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12(E), the CPU 103 sets the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the RAM 102 based on that the setting key 112IW051 is turned off by the operation of the clerk at the game hall. In the backup area of (update memory). At this time, the CPU 103, on the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio for the set value set at that time. Display base 1 and base 2. Also RAM
If the pending storage is stored in the backup area 102, the pending storage is cleared. Further, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 9-12(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state in which the game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a big hit type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12(F), the CPU 103 displays “EEEE” on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 that stores the set value. It is possible to

In the setting change process in the characteristic unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. You may make it display a setting value ("3" in case of this characteristic part 112IW).

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the present feature part 112IW will be described. 9-13 and 9-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 112IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

By performing the processing of steps 112IWS102 to S104, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in this feature unit 112IW. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in accordance with the order of starting winning in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories=1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the content of each storage area (step 112IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the content of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is shifted.

That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS108). As described above, in the characteristic part 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 112 IWS011, but even after the power is turned on, the step The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 112 IWS 108.

Even if the same variation pattern is used, if different variation pattern commands are transmitted for each setting value, variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns x the number of setting values (3 in this example) are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of setting values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent for the set value command (see step 112IWS011) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 112IWS108) sent when the fluctuation starts. It is not limited to various forms. For example, even if the set value command for power-on and the set value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands and different set value commands are transmitted at power-on and at fluctuation start Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted when the set value is “3”.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which setting value is set on the effect control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. Alternatively, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected with a setting value of 3, or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence/absence of pseudo stations, number of pseudo stations, presence/absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio The variation pattern may be selected with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to send a background designating command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, and controls to transmit a time saving state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 9-4) with a random number value MR1 and determining that the jackpot is a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination process.

If the random number value MR1 does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the process proceeds to step 112IWS116.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 112IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 9-5) to identify the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as a big hit type (step 112IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may decide to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to the big hit type.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

The present characteristic portion 112IW includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling is likely to be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 9-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that has been set (for example, see FIG. 9-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 9-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game, which is higher than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 9-5(A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a set value that has been set (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state, With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
Equipped with production execution means that can execute production,
The effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state, regardless of the set value being set. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 8 of the first invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance in accordance with the set value that has been set, and such a configuration would result in excessive gambling. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 9 of the first invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to multiple types of advantageous states,
The game control means can control to any of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 9-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-12, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

Further, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following second invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling is likely to be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and such a configuration may result in excessive gambling. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game, which is higher than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that is set. According to such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value (for example, refer to FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-12, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

Note that the structure shown by the characteristic portion 112IW can be combined with the structure shown by other characteristic portions as appropriate to form a gaming machine.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 248F to the characteristic part 250F)
Next, the characteristic parts 248F to 250F will be described. The characteristic part 248F has a characteristic regarding the continuation rate suggesting effect, the characteristic part 249F has a characteristic regarding the setting suggesting effect pattern A, and the characteristic part 250F has a characteristic regarding the setting suggesting effect pattern B.

(About specifications)
FIG. 10A is a diagram for explaining the specifications at each set value. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the setting 1, the jackpot probability at non-probability change is 1/319, the jackpot probability at probability change is 1/95, and the ST continuation rate is 65.29%. In setting 2, the jackpot probability at non-probability change is 1/280, the jackpot probability at probability change is 1/75, and the ST continuation rate is 73.87%. In setting 3, the jackpot probability at non-probability change is 1/250, the jackpot probability at probability change is 1/60, and the ST continuation rate is 81.37%. Here, the ST continuation rate indicates the probability that the ST state will continue. The ST state is a state in which the probability variation state is controlled after the jackpot game state and the probability variation state continues until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. In the characteristic portion 248F to the characteristic portion 250F, ST continues 100 times after the big hit game state. Note that the continuation rate is the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state, the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the same gaming state (for example, probability variation), the probability of being repeatedly controlled to a high base state (for example, probability variation, It is a concept that includes the probability of being controlled in the order of time reduction and probability variation.

According to the data setting shown in FIG. 10A, in the case of setting 1, all of the jackpot probability at the non-probability change, the jackpot probability at the probability change, and the ST continuation rate are the lowest among the set values. On the other hand, in the case of setting 3, all of the big hit probability at the time of non-probability change, the big hit probability at the time of probability change, and the ST continuation rate are the highest among the set values. Therefore, the relationship of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the set value may be further provided with a plurality of stages, and for example, may be provided so as to be advantageous to the player in the stages of 1 to 6.

(Regarding the flow of various effects from the characteristic part 248F to the characteristic part 250F)
FIG. 10-2 is a timing chart showing the flow of various effects. FIG. 10-2(A) shows the flow of the continuation rate suggesting effect which is the effect of the characteristic part 248F, and FIG. 10-2(B) shows the flow of the setting suggesting effect (pattern A) which is the effect of the characteristic part 249F. 10-2(C) shows the flow of the setting suggestion effect (pattern B) which is the effect of the characteristic portion 250F.

First, the continuation rate suggesting effect which is the effect of the characteristic portion 248F shown in FIG. 10-2(A) will be described. The continuation rate suggestive effect is an effect that suggests a different ST continuity rate for each set value. In addition, since the continuation rate is different for each set value, suggesting the continuity rate also implies suggesting the set value. As shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the continuation rate suggesting effect is an effect executed in the ending period after the big hit game state. After the jackpot gaming state is over, information such as the entry into ST and the number of wins is shown to the player as an image for a predetermined period. A continuation rate suggestive effect may be executed in the ending period. After that, the ST state continues for 100 fluctuations as the ST period.

Next, the setting suggestion effect (pattern A), which is the effect of the characteristic part 249F, shown in FIG. 10-2(B) will be described. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests which of the setting values is set among a plurality of levels. In the setting suggestion effect of the pattern A, when the big hit game state and the big hit game state are controlled during the variable display of 1 to 20 rotations, which is the early number, in the ST period of 100 times after the ending period ends. The setting suggestion effect is executed during the round. Further, in the setting suggesting effect of the pattern A, the setting suggesting effect is not executed when a big hit occurs between the variable displays of 21 to 100 rotations. That is, in the setting suggestion effect of the pattern A, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled at any number of the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST period advantageous to the player, any of the 21st to 100th rotations. It can be said that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than that when the big hit game state is controlled by the number of times (100:0 ratio).

Next, the setting suggestion effect (pattern B) which is the effect of the characteristic part 250F shown in FIG. 10-2(C) will be described. In pattern B, setting suggestion effect is executed similarly to pattern A. In the setting suggestion effect of the pattern B, the variable display period of 1 to 20 rotations, which is the earlier number, is the first setting suggestion effect period among the 100 times ST period after the jackpot gaming state and the ending period are ended. There is. The setting suggestion effect is executed during the round when the jackpot gaming state is controlled by the variable display during the first setting suggestion effect period. In the pattern B setting suggestion effect, the variable display period of 21 to 100 rotations in the ST period is the second setting suggestion effect period. The setting suggestion effect is executed during the round when the jackpot game state is controlled by the variable display during the second setting suggestion effect period. Here, in the first setting suggestion effect period and the second setting suggestion effect period, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled to the big hit game state is different. Moreover, when the big hit game state is controlled in the first setting suggesting production period of the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST period that is advantageous for the player, the big hit game is performed in the second setting suggesting production period of the 21st to 100th rotations. The execution rate of the setting suggestive effect is higher than that when the state is controlled.

Here, in the gaming machine with no set value, the continuation rate of the ST state is constant. Therefore, even if the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed on such a gaming machine, it is not interesting. However, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the continuation rate suggesting effect that suggests to the player the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state in the ST state is executed by the game machine with the set value, so the setting is made. It is possible to draw attention to the suggested production, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, the continuation rate suggesting effect is an effect executed in an ending period in which a relatively long time can be taken. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention when the big hit game state ends, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the setting suggestion effect of the pattern A is executed during the round. By doing so, it is possible to focus on the round game and improve the interest of the game during the round game.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect of pattern B is also executed during the round. By doing so, it is possible to focus on the round game and improve the interest of the game during the round game.

(About the characteristic part 248F)
Next, the continuation rate suggesting effect which is an effect of the characteristic portion 248F will be described in detail. FIG. 10-3 is a diagram showing a continuation rate suggestive effect determination table. The continuation rate suggestive effect determination table is a table used in the continuation rate suggestive effect process or the pending continuous effect process described later. Using the continuation rate suggesting effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the effect is executed, and if so, which effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) is to be executed. The continuation rate suggestive effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

As shown in the continuation rate suggesting effect determination table, in the setting 1, the ratio determined without the effect is 88%, the ratio determined with the character A is 5%, the ratio determined with the character B is 4%, and the character C. The ratio determined to be 3%, and the ratio determined to be character D is 0% (0%). In setting 2, the proportion determined without the effect is 88%, the proportion determined with the character A is 3%, the proportion determined with the character B is 5%, the proportion determined with the character C is 4%, and the character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In the setting 3, the proportion determined without the effect is 87%, the proportion determined with the character A is 3%, the proportion determined with the character B is 4%, the proportion determined with the character C is 5%, the character D. The percentage determined by is 1%.

Due to the data setting shown in FIG. 10C, in the continuation rate suggesting effect processing, the rate of selecting no effect is high, and the continuation rate suggesting effect is difficult to be executed. In addition, the ratio of the case where the effect is executed is "character A>character B>character C" in the case of setting 1, "character B>character C>character A" in the case of setting 2, and in the case of setting 3. “Character C>Character B>Character A>Character D”. That is, since the appearance rate of the character varies depending on the set value, it is possible to suggest a different ST continuation rate for each set value from the character aspect. Further, since the character D appears only in the most advantageous setting 3, when the character D appears, the determination rate is determined to be the high setting 3 when the character D appears. It should be noted that any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined to have no effect.

As shown in FIG. 10C, the characters A to C are in a mode in which they can be executed regardless of the set values. Therefore, the set value can be more preferably suggested by the mode of these characters having different execution ratios, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10C, the presentation mode of the continuation rate suggestive effect includes the character D that is determined to be set in the high continuation rate setting 3. According to this, when the character D having a low execution rate appears, the high setting is confirmed, so that the set value can be suitably suggested, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuation rate suggesting effect process. The continuation rate suggesting effect process is a process executed in the ending effect process (S177).

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit from the normal state (248FS001). Whether or not it is a big hit from the normal state, that is, a so-called first hit is determined based on a command designating a game state. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit from the normal state (Y in 248FS001), the process is ended. That is, in the first win, the continuation rate suggesting effect is controlled so as not to be executed. Note that the continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed in the first win. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not the big hit from the normal state (N in 248FS001), the effect content of the continuation rate suggestive effect is determined by the continuation rate suggestive effect determination table according to the set value. (248FS002) The process moves to 248FS003.

In 248FS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the continuation rate suggesting effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the continuation rate suggesting effect (Y in 248FS003), it sets to execute the determined continuation rate suggesting effect (248FS004), and ends the process. As a result, the continuation rate suggesting effect is set to be executed during the predetermined period of the ending period. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuation rate suggesting effect (N in 248FS003), the process ends.

It should be noted that the continuation rate suggesting effect is not necessarily executed when the predetermined period is reached while the execution is determined, and may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B operable by the player, and the continuation rate suggesting effect is not executed unless the push button 31B is operated during the operable period. Good. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for operation. Further, when the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed by using the operation means, the promotion image for promoting the operation on the operation means may be displayed, or the promotion image may not be displayed.

Further, although the continuation rate suggesting effect is often not executed, the continuation rate suggesting effect by the characters A to D may be executed at a rate of 100%. Even in such a case, it is desirable that the appearance rate of the character D for which the setting 3 is confirmed is lower than the appearance rates of other characters. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from being immediately revealed to the player.

FIG. 10-5 is a diagram showing an example of the hold consecutive effect determination table and the effect determination table with the held consecutive effect. These tables are stored in the ROM 121. In the characteristic part 248F, a hold consecutive effect may be executed. The holding continuous effect is to determine whether or not the holding storage information (holding information) related to the variable display includes holding storage information that is a big hit (holding storage information that is a so-called holding series) (whether or not it is a holding series). When the pre-reading process is performed and when the held storage information that is a big hit is included, an effect that suggests that the held storage information that is a big hit is included (holding consecutive suggestion effect) is executed by the effect control CPU 120. Is. In the suspended continuous production, the production using a character similar to the continuation rate suggesting production described above is executed. Then, the current setting value is suggested by the aspect of the character that is executed in the hold continuous production.

The holding continuous effect determination table of FIG. 10-5(A) is used to determine whether or not to execute the continuous holding effect when there is big hit holding storage information. As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), the ratio of executing the continuous holding effect is set to 70%, and the ratio of not executing the continuous holding effect is set to 30%. In addition, when there is the pending storage information that is a big hit, the pending consecutive effects may be executed at a rate of 100%.

In the production determination table with holding continuous production of FIG. 10-5(B), which production (character A, character B, character C or character D) is to be executed when it is determined to execute the pending continuous production. Used to determine As shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in setting 1, the proportion determined by the character A is 30%, the proportion determined by the character B is 20%, the proportion determined by the character C is 10%, and the character The ratio determined by D is set to 40%. Further, in setting 2, the proportion determined by the character A is 10%, the proportion determined by the character B is 30%, the proportion determined by the character C is 20%, and the proportion determined by the character D is 40%. Is set to be. Further, in the setting 3, the proportion determined by the character A is 10%, the proportion determined by the character B is 20%, the proportion determined by the character C is 30%, and the proportion determined by the character D is 40%. Is set to be.

By setting the data shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in the case of the held consecutive effect in the held consecutive effect processing, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is the character regardless of the set value. D is the highest, and the ratio is constant regardless of the set value. In other words, the character D that appears only in the setting 3 of the continuation rate suggesting effect is not an effect that suggests the set value in the continuous holding effect. However, since the character D appears with a very low probability when the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed, the effect appears at a high rate when the hold consecutive effect is executed, so that the interest of the game is improved. You can Further, it can be said that the high setting is finalized when the character D does not appear but is not put on hold.

Paying attention to characters other than the character D, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is “character A>character B>character C” in the case of setting 1 and “character B>character C>character A in the case of setting 2”. , And in the case of setting 3, "character C>character B>character A". With such a setting, the set value is suggested by executing the continuous holding effect.

FIG. 10-6 is a flow chart showing an example of the continuous retention effect process. The hold continuous production process is a process executed in the ending production process (S177). First, the effect control CPU 120 checks the inside of the pending storage buffer (248FS010) and determines whether or not there is a jackpot pending storage (248FS011). When it is determined that there is a big hit holding storage (Y in 248FS011), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the holding continuous effect from the holding continuous effect determination table (248FS012), and proceeds to 248FS013. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no big hit holding storage (N in 248FS01), the process proceeds to 248FS015.

In 248FS013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending continuous effect. When the production control CPU 120 determines to execute the held continuous production (Y in 248FS013), the effect control table determines the contents of the production based on the production determination table with the held consecutive production (248FS014) and proceeds to 248FS016. Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets to execute the determined content (248FS016), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the pending continuous effect (N in 248FS013), the process proceeds to 248FS015.

In 248FS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect content by the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table. Here, the continuation rate suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 10C is used regardless of whether there is no big hit pending storage or when the pending continuous effect is not executed. As a result, even in the case of a big hit where the continuous holding effect is not executed, the lottery for the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed every time, so that the interest in the big hit can be improved. Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets to execute the determined content (248FS016), and ends the process.

The continuation rate suggesting effect process and the continuation rate suggesting effect process described above may be collectively executed in the same flow. In such a case, in the case of a big hit from the normal state, the holding continuous effect may not be executed.

In addition, since the same character as the continuation rate suggesting effect appears in the hold consecutive effect, the interest of the game can be improved by combining the continuation rate suggesting effect and the hold consecutive effect. It should be noted that different characters may be displayed in the hold consecutive effect and the continuation rate suggesting effect.

(Regarding the setting suggestion effect executed by the characteristic unit 249F)
Next, the setting suggestion effect executed in the characteristic unit 249F will be described. FIG. 10-7 is a diagram showing an example of a production operation of setting suggestive production. FIG. 10-7 shows an example of the setting suggestive effect pattern A shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the image display device 5 carries out an effect indicating that the big hit has occurred. Further, a remaining number display 249F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The remaining number display is decreased by one each time the variable display is executed once. FIG. 10-7(A) shows a case where the remaining 97 rotations of the third rotation result in a big hit.

Next, the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 10-7(B) is executed during the period during the big hit round. In the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect using the push button 31B is executed as the number of times of setting suggestion effect corresponding to the remaining number of times up to ST20. On the right side of the screen, a setting suggestion residual image 249F002 indicating the number of remaining setting suggestion effects is displayed. In addition, a button image 249F003 simulating the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining setting suggestion effect count is indicated by the letters "Chance is 17 times!" at the upper part thereof. In this way, if the jackpot is a big hit as early as possible in the ST period, the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed is increased. Therefore, in the ST1 to 20th rotations as the predetermined period, it is suggested that the jackpot is won at the early number. It is possible to increase the execution ratio of the performance.

FIG. 10-7(C) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 10-7(C), when the pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is selected or when the push button 31B is not operated, the setting suggestion effect is not executed and nothing is displayed on the screen. Is also not displayed. On the other hand, FIG. 10-7(D) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-7(D), when the pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is selected and the player operates the push button 31B, the character image 249F004 is displayed on the screen as the setting suggestion effect. It

A plurality of types of button images 249F003 shown in FIG. 10-7(B) may be provided. For example, a button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A may be provided, and when the stick controller 31A is operated, the character image 249F004 may appear at a higher rate than when the push button 31B is operated. Further, when the button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A is displayed, the appearance ratio of any one of the plurality of types of character images 249F004 may be increased. For example, when the button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A is displayed, the character D suggesting a high setting may appear at a high rate, or always appears (the character D is confirmed). Good. Further, even if there is only one operation means, the appearance ratio of the character image that appears depending on the change in the shape, color, etc. of the button image may be different.

Further, the character image 249F004 shown in FIG. 10-7(D) may appear twice or more because the setting suggestion effect by the button image 249F003 is executed multiple times. In such a case, when the second and subsequent character images 249F004 are displayed, the character images 249F004 displayed by the previous operation may be displayed in parallel. Further, the previous display may be updated so that a new character image 249F004 is displayed. In addition, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect may be increased by changing the display mode of the previous character image 249F004 (for example, a pose in which the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high, the color of the clothes is indicated as the reliability degree). Change to a higher color). Further, it is also possible to perform an effect such that the reliability is displayed as a percentage together with the plurality of character images 249F004 and the percentage display corresponding to the character image 249F004 corresponding to the actual set value is increased. In this way, it is possible to improve the reliability of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times.

FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion effect determination table. In the setting suggestion effect determination table, in the setting suggestion effect process, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations in the ST period, and which effect (character A, It is a table used for deciding whether to execute the character B, the character C, or the character D). The setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

As shown in the setting suggestion effect determination table, in setting 1, the ratio determined without effect is 88%, the ratio determined with character A is 5%, the ratio determined with character B is 4%, and with character C. The determined ratio is 3%, and the character D has no determined ratio (0%). In setting 2, the proportion determined without the effect is 88%, the proportion determined with the character A is 3%, the proportion determined with the character B is 5%, the proportion determined with the character C is 4%, and the character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In the setting 3, the proportion determined without the effect is 87%, the proportion determined with the character A is 3%, the proportion determined with the character B is 4%, the proportion determined with the character C is 5%, the character D. The percentage determined by is 1%.

By setting the data shown in FIG. 10-8, in the setting suggestion effect process, when the big hit is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST, the ratio of no effect is selected is high, and the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be executed. Has become. When the setting suggestion effect is executed, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is “character A>character B>character C” in the case of setting 1, and “character B in the case of setting 2”. >Character C>Character A”, and setting 3 is “Character C>Character B>Character A”. That is, since the appearance rate of the character varies depending on the set value, it is possible to suggest the set value from the aspect of the character. Further, since the character D appears only in the most advantageous setting 3, when the character D appears, the determination rate is determined to be the high setting 3 when the character D appears. It should be noted that any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined to have no effect.

FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion effect processing. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the big hit medium effect process (S176). First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (249FS001). The production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST by confirming the number of times stored in the variation number counter for counting the number of variable displays during ST. judge. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (Y in 249FS001), the effect content of the setting suggestion effect is set by the setting suggestion effect determination table according to the set value. It is determined (249FS002), and the process proceeds to 249FS003. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (N in 249FS001), the process ends.

In 249FS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect (Y in 249FS003), it sets to execute the setting suggestion effect according to the ST remaining number of times (249FS004), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the setting suggestion effect (N in 249FS003), the process ends.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the setting suggestive effect is set when the big hit is controlled at 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST and when the big hit is controlled at 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. The execution ratios are different (the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the 21st to 100th times). In this way, in the ST state, when the jackpot is controlled to the big hit at any of the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, and when the big hit at any of the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST. Since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different when the game state is controlled, it is possible to focus attention on the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

In particular, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the ST start (at the 21st to 100th rotations). Because the setting suggestion effect is not executed), by controlling to the big hit game state at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the big hit game state continues and the interest is improved, and attention is paid to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. be able to.

Further, since the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST are the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotations, the jackpot game at the 1st to 20th rotations earlier than the 21st to 100th rotations when controlled to the ST state Even if it is controlled to the state, it is possible to prevent the user from thinking that it is lost (for example, the effect of seeing only during ST cannot be sufficiently seen).

The period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is set as a period including the 1st to 20th rotations but not including the 21st to 100th rotations. By doing this, it is possible to focus on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the big hit game state is controlled within the predetermined period. It should be noted that if the effect up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is a special time period during which the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the effect is executed. Good. For example, the background may be changed or a telop indicating a special period may be displayed during the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST.

In the 21st to 100th rotations including the 1st to 20th rotations, the lottery of the setting suggestive effect is not executed by the same table, but the lottery is performed by using a different table for each variable display or multiple times. May be executed. In such a case, the rate of execution of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability may be higher at the earlier times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8, when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the setting with higher reliability is made than when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST. Since the suggestion effect is executed (the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the 21st to 100th times), the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high. The high reliability of the setting suggestion effect means that the setting difference becomes more prominent, so that the player can easily guess which setting value. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the setting suggestion effect when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST state, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

(Regarding a modified example of the characteristic unit 249F)
FIG. 10-10 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion effect determination table of the modified example. 10-10(A) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations, and FIG. 10-10(B) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the modification, different tables are used for ST1 to 20 rotations and ST21 to 100 rotations, but the setting suggestion effect is executed regardless of the number of changes. Further, in the modified example, the setting suggestion effect in which some character appears regardless of the number of ST hits is executed. These tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The setting suggestion determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations in FIG. 10-10(A) shows which setting suggestive effects (character A, character B, character C) when it is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST. Alternatively, it is a table used for determining whether to execute the character D). In setting 1, the ratio determined by the character A is 50%, the ratio determined by the character B is 30%, the ratio determined by the character C is 20%, and the ratio determined by the character D is none (at 0%. is there). In setting 2, the proportion determined by the character A is 20%, the proportion determined by the character B is 50%, the proportion determined by the character C is 30%, and the proportion determined by the character D is none (at 0%. is there). In setting 3, the proportion determined by the character A is 20%, the proportion determined by the character B is 30%, the proportion determined by the character C is 40%, and the proportion determined by the character D is 10%.

In the setting suggesting effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations of ST21 to 100 rotations of FIG. 10-10(B), in the setting suggesting producing process, when the jackpot is within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST, which setting suggesting effect (character A , Character B, character C or character D) to be executed. In setting 1, the proportion determined by the character A is 40%, the proportion determined by the character B is 30%, the proportion determined by the character C is 30%, and the proportion determined by the character D is none (at 0%. is there). In setting 2, the ratio determined by the character A is 30%, the ratio determined by the character B is 40%, the ratio determined by the character C is 30%, and the ratio determined by the character D is none (at 0%. is there). In setting 3, the proportion determined by the character A is 30%, the proportion determined by the character B is 30%, the proportion determined by the character C is 35%, and the proportion determined by the character D is 5%.

By setting the data shown in FIGS. 10-10 (A) and (B), in the setting suggestion effect process, if a big hit occurs from the start of ST to the end of ST, no effect is not selected. , Always one of the effects is executed. The ratio selected as an effect to be executed differs depending on whether it is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST or within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. If it is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is “character A>character B>character C” in the case of setting 1, and “character B in the case of setting 2. “Character C>Character A”, and in the case of setting 3, “Character C>Character B>Character A>Character D”. Further, in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is "character A>character B=character C" in the case of setting 1, and "the ratio in the case of setting 2". Character B>character A=character C”, and in the case of setting 3, “character C>character A=character B>character D”.

With such a setting, the character corresponding to the set value both within 1 to 20 rotations from ST start and within 21 to 100 rotations from ST start is character A in setting 1 and character B in setting 2. In setting 3, the appearance rate of the character C is high. However, the appearance ratio of the character having the highest appearance rate in each set value is higher in the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Therefore, it can be said that the reliability of the set value for the character is higher in the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Further, if the character D appears regardless of the number of changes, it is determined that the setting 3 is set. In addition, you may make it differ in the content of the effect performed by 1 to 20 rotations or less from ST start, and 21 to 100 rotations or less from ST start.

(Regarding setting suggestion effect executed in the characteristic part 250F)
Next, the setting suggestion effect executed in the characteristic part 250F will be described. FIG. 10-11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a production operation of setting suggestive production. FIG. 10-11 shows an example of a big hit within the ST1 to 20th rotations and a big hit within the ST21 to 100th rotations in the setting suggestion effect pattern B shown in FIG. 10-2(C). ing. As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), which is when the big hit occurs within the first to 20th rotations of ST1, the image display device 5 carries out an effect indicating that the big hit occurs during the big hit. Further, a remaining number display 250F001 showing the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The remaining number display is decreased by one each time the variable display is executed once. FIG. 10-11(A) shows a case in which a big hit is reached in the remaining 97 rotations in the third rotation after the start of ST.

Next, during the big hit round, the first setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is executed. In the first setting suggestion effect, a darts effect in which the arrow image 250F002 is applied toward the target image 250F004 in which “◯” and “x” are drawn is executed. When a big hit occurs within the first to 20th rotations of ST1, an effect in which the arrow can be thrown four times is executed at any rotation speed. "Chance is four times!" at the upper part of the target image 250F004 is a character indicating that there is an effect that the arrow can be thrown four times. When the push button 31B is pressed while the button image 250F003 imitating the push button 31B displayed at the lower right of the screen is displayed, the arrow image 250F002 flies toward the target image 250F004.

FIG. 10-11(C) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 10-11(C), when the arrow image 250F002 hits "x" of the target image 250F004, "x" which is a failure image 250F005 indicating that the setting suggestive production has failed is displayed on the screen. Displayed in the center. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11(D) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-11(D), when the arrow image 250F002 hits “◯” in the target image 250F004, the character D image 250F006, for example, is displayed from a plurality of characters as the setting suggesting effect was successful. It

As shown in FIG. 10-11(E), which is when the big hit occurs within the ST21 to 100th rotations, the image display device 5 carries out an effect indicating that the big hit occurs during the big hit. Further, the remaining number display 250F001 showing the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The remaining number display is decreased by one each time the variable display is executed once. FIG. 10-11(E) shows a case in which the big hit occurs at the remaining 45 rotations after the 55th rotation after the start of ST.

Next, during the big hit round, the second setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-11(F) is executed. In the second setting suggestion effect, a bowling effect in which the pin image 250F008 is defeated by throwing the ball image 250F007 toward the six pin images 250F008 is executed. When a big hit occurs within the ST21 to 100th rotations, a bowling effect in which the ball can be thrown twice is executed at any rotation speed. "Chance is twice!" at the top of the pin image 250F008 is a character indicating that there is an effect that the ball can be thrown twice. When the push button 31B is pressed while the button image 250F003 imitating the push button 31B displayed at the lower right of the screen is displayed, the ball image 250F007 rolls toward the pin image 250F008.

FIG. 10-11(G) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 10-11(G), when the ball image 250F007 does not hit the pin image 250F008, or when all the pin images 250F008 do not fall by one throw, it indicates that the setting suggestion effect has failed. The failure image 250F005, “x”, is displayed in the center of the screen. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11(H) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-11(H), when the ball image 250F007 hits the pin image 250F008 and all the pin images 250F008 have fallen, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect has succeeded, and for example, the character C image 250F009. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11, the presentation mode of the setting suggestion production is when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the ST start and when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the ST start. different. In this way, in the ST state, when the big hit game state is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations, and when the big hit game state is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the execution timing of the effect that suggests the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

FIG. 10-12 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table. 10-12(A) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations, and FIG. 10-12(B) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations. These tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the setting suggestion effect process, the setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations of FIG. 10-12(A) indicates whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when it is a big hit within 1 to 20 revolutions from the start of ST. It is a table used for determining which setting suggestive effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) to be executed when executing. In the setting 1, the proportion determined without the effect is 82%, the proportion determined with the character A is 7%, the proportion determined with the character B is 6%, the proportion determined with the character C is 5%, and the character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In the setting 2, the proportion determined without the effect is 82%, the proportion determined with the character A is 5%, the proportion determined with the character B is 7%, the proportion determined with the character C is 6%, and the character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In the setting 3, the ratio determined to have no effect is 77%, the ratio determined to the character A is 5%, the ratio determined to the character B is 6%, the ratio determined to the character C is 7%, and the character D. The ratio determined to be 5% is 5%.

In the setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations of FIG. 10-12(B), in the setting suggestion effect process, when it is a big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST, whether the setting suggestive effect is executed or not, It is a table used for determining which setting suggestive effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) to be executed when executing. In the setting 1, the proportion determined without the effect is 88%, the proportion determined with the character A is 5%, the proportion determined with the character B is 4%, the proportion determined with the character C is 3%, and the character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, the proportion determined without the effect is 88%, the proportion determined with the character A is 3%, the proportion determined with the character B is 5%, the proportion determined with the character C is 4%, and the character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In the setting 3, the proportion determined without the effect is 86%, the proportion determined with the character A is 3%, the proportion determined with the character B is 4%, the proportion determined with the character C is 5%, and the character D. The percentage determined by is 2%.

By setting the data shown in FIGS. 10-12 (A) and (B), in the setting suggesting effect process, if the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST, it does not depend on the rotation speed from the start of ST. , The ratio of selecting no effect is high, and it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect is executed, the ratio selected as the executed effect is “character A>character B>character C” in the case of setting 1, and “character B>character in the case of setting 2”. C> character A”, and in the case of setting 3, “character C> character B> character A”.

With such a setting, the character corresponding to the set value both within 1 to 20 rotations from ST start and within 21 to 100 rotations from ST start is character A in setting 1 and character B in setting 2. In setting 3, the appearance rate of the character C is high. However, the appearance ratio is higher in the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the ST start than in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the ST start. Therefore, it can be said that the reliability of the set value for the character is higher in the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. In addition, the character D is displayed regardless of the number of changes.
If appears, it is determined that the setting 3 is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the ST start, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the ST start. Is high. In this way, by controlling the big hit at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the big hit game state continues, the interest is improved, and attention can be paid to the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

Further, since the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST are the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotations, the jackpot game at the 1st to 20th rotations earlier than the 21st to 100th rotations when controlled to the ST state Even if it is controlled to the state, it is possible to prevent the user from thinking that it is lost (for example, the effect of seeing only during ST cannot be sufficiently seen).

The period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is set as a period including the 1st to 20th rotations but not including the 21st to 100th rotations. By doing this, it is possible to focus on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the big hit game state is controlled within the predetermined period. In addition, during the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST, a performance is performed that indicates that the ratio of the setting suggestion performance to be executed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled is higher than that after the 21st rotation. You should do so. For example, the background may be changed or a telop indicating a special period may be displayed during the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the ST start, the setting with higher reliability is made compared to when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the ST start. Suggestive production is executed. The high reliability of the setting suggestion effect means that the setting difference becomes more prominent, so that the player can easily guess which setting value. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the setting suggestion effect when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST state, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion effect process. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the big hit medium effect process (S176).

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (250FS001). The production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST by confirming the number of times stored in the variation number counter for counting the number of variable displays during ST. judge. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (Y in 250FS001), the effect content of the setting suggestion effect is set by the setting suggestion effect determination table for ST 1 to 20 rotations. It is determined (250FS002), and the process proceeds to 250FS003. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (N in 250FS001), the process shifts to 250FS005.

In 250FS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (Y in 250FS003), the effect control CPU 120 sets the darts effect to be performed four times as the setting suggestion effect (250FS004), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the setting suggestion effect (N in 250FS003), the process ends.

In 250FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot is within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST by confirming the number of times stored in the variation counter for counting the number of variable displays during ST. judge. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST (Y in 250FS005), the effect content of the setting suggestion effect is set by the setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations. It is determined (250FS006), and the process proceeds to 250FS007. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not a big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST (N in 250FS005), the process is ended.

In 250FS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect (Y in 250FS007), the setting control effect is set to perform the bowling effect twice (250FS008), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the setting suggestion effect (N in 250FS007), the process ends.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be executed without fail when a big hit occurs during ST. Even in such a case, the big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST is executed at a higher rate than the big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. It is desirable to do so. Further, the appearance rate of only the character having the highest appearance rate may be changed according to the set value depending on the number of rotations from the start of ST.

(Regarding the modified example of the characteristic part)
Although the characteristic portions 248F to 250F have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, Included in the invention. Below, the modification of the characteristic parts 248F-250F is demonstrated.

The continuation rate suggesting effect of FIG. 10-2(A) may be executed at the start of the ST state that is the start of the special state and at the end of the ST state that is the end of the special state. Specifically, the continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed at least at one of the start of the ST period (ST1 rotation) and the end of the ST period (ST100 rotation). In such a case, a variation pattern that is not selected in the ST2 to 99th rotations may be selected as the variation pattern. In particular, at the 100th rotation, a long variation pattern is selected to display the obtained payout. Therefore, the continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed during the payout display period. .. As the continuation rate suggesting effect, an effect suggested by the color of the effect around the screen of the image display device 5, an effect suggested by the character mode, an effect suggested by the display content of the character, an effect suggested by the character form. At least one of (for example, the color of the light guide plate that reflects the light incident from the side and emits the light to the front side) may be executed.

Further, when the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed, it is not automatically executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 side, but is executed by the player operating the operation means at a different timing or a different method from usual. You may Specifically, the continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed when the back button operation is executed by long pressing the button or inputting a command such as a cross key.

The effect control command designating the display result is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 side by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Then, the above-mentioned continuous holding effect may be executed based on the reception of the command. In such a case, if the effect control command that specifies the display result is not normal due to some influence, the effect control CPU 120 restricts the execution of the holding continuous effect in the same effect mode as the continuation rate suggesting effect. do it. By doing so, it is possible to prevent suggesting incorrect information to the player. Note that the effect to be limited may be determined in advance, such as not executing only the effect in which the character D whose high setting is confirmed appears.

The CPU 103 of the game controlling microcomputer 100 transmits information about the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 of FIG. 9-9, step 112IWS108 of FIG. 9-13, and the like. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuation rate suggesting effect based on the information regarding the set value, as shown in FIG. 10-4. In such a case, when the set value command is not normal as the information related to the set value, the effect control CPU 120 may limit the execution of the continuation rate suggesting effect with the high continuation determination. By doing so, it is possible to prevent suggesting an incorrect set value to the player without reducing the number of executions of the continuation rate suggesting effect. Instead of limiting, a continuation rate suggesting effect that suggests low continuation may be executed.

The continuation rate suggesting effect and the holding continuous effect are not effects that simply cause a character to appear, but effects that show the continuation rate or the like as a result of execution of some kind of effect such as the roulette effect or bowling effect described above. Good.

Regarding the continuation rate suggesting effect, the case where the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed when the jackpot is not the big hit from the normal state has been described. However, the continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed even in the case of a big hit from the normal state. Further, in such a case, the held consecutive effects may be executed at the same time, or the execution of the held consecutive effects may be restricted (for example, the held consecutive effects are not executed for the first time).

The continuation rate suggesting effect may be made more reliable by continuously entering the ST state. By doing so, the interest of the game when the ST state continues is improved. On the contrary, when the ST state is immediately ended (for example, when the ST is finished once), the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed at the end of ST, and in that case, the continuity rate suggestion effect is produced by the highly reliable table. It should be executed. In this way, the set value is suggested even if the ST state ends at an early stage. Therefore, if the possibility of a high setting is suggested, the player can be prompted to continue the game. , Interest is improved.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the setting suggesting effect has a higher execution rate when the big hit is controlled at 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than when it is controlled to the big hit at 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. It was getting higher. However, when the big hit is controlled at 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be set higher than when the big hit is controlled at 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST. Specifically, when the number of times is just before the end of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than when the number of times is just after the start of ST. By doing this, it is possible to give attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect while giving a sense of security when the game is controlled to the big hit game state at a number of times slower than the number of times after the start of ST when being controlled to the ST state. ..

The CPU 103 of the game controlling microcomputer 100 transmits information about the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 of FIG. 9-9, step 112IWS108 of FIG. 9-13, and the like. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process of FIG. 10-9 based on the information about the set value. In such a case, when the setting value command is not normal as the information regarding the setting value, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the setting suggesting effect of the low setting. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an incorrect setting value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed. It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect selected by the lottery is executed without executing only the pattern for confirming the high setting without making a tentative decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting. It may be done. Further, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-7, in the invention relating to the characteristic portion 249F, the case where the effect is performed using the operation means for the remaining number of times up to the ST20th rotation has been described. However, the effect using the operation means may not be executed. Further, the lottery may be executed not as every time the remaining number of times is drawn, but as a plurality of times as one set suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the setting suggestive effect is controlled to be a big hit at the 1st to 20th rotations from the ST start, the execution ratio is higher than that at the 21st to 100th rotations from the ST start. It was getting higher. However, when the big hit is controlled at 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be set higher than when the big hit is controlled at 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST. Specifically, when the number of times is just before the end of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than when the number of times is just after the start of ST. By doing this, it is possible to give attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect while giving a sense of security when the game is controlled to the big hit game state at a number of times slower than the number of times after the start of ST when being controlled to the ST state. ..

The CPU 103 of the game controlling microcomputer 100 transmits information about the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 of FIG. 9-9, step 112IWS108 of FIG. 9-13, and the like. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process of FIG. 10-13 based on the information about the set value. In such a case, when the set value command is not normal as the information about the set value, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an incorrect setting value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed. It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect selected by lottery is executed without executing only the pattern for confirming the high setting without making a tentative decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting. It may be done. Further, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

In the continuation rate suggesting effect of FIG. 10-3, the setting suggesting effect of FIG. 10-8, and the setting suggesting effect of FIG. 10-12, the presence or absence of the effect and the character when the effect is executed are determined at the same time. However, a table for determining the presence or absence of the effect and a table for determining the character when the effect is executed may be separately provided.

The continuation rate suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect may be executed not only when the big hit is controlled but also when it is out of control. Further, in such a case, various effects may be executed by the fact that the ST period ends without a big hit being executed, or such a state continues for a plurality of times.

The round in which the setting suggestive effect pattern A and the setting suggestive effect pattern B are executed may be determined in advance. Further, the round to be executed may be determined by random lottery. Also, these effects may be executed in the ending period. Further, the timing of execution may differ depending on the remaining number of STs.

Note that the control in the above-mentioned characteristic portion may be applied in combination with each other. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the effect related to the setting suggestion.

(Explanation of Invention Concerning Characteristic Section 248F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 248F includes the following inventions regarding the above-described characteristic portion 248F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko game machine, a giraffe is displayed while the identification information is variably displayed according to the set value before and after the change of the set value.
There has been a game machine that displays either an elephant or a lion and suggests a set value (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). Further, there has been a gaming machine in which the high probability state is maintained until the variable display of the identification information of a specific number of times is executed (for example, see JP 2011-218044 A).

However, when the game machine such as JP 2011-218044 A executes the effect suggesting the setting like JP 2010-200902, there is room for improvement in the effect suggesting the setting. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 248F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player, and ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state becomes high until variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) ( For example, the CPU 103)
The probability that the advantageous state is controlled in the special state varies depending on the set value (for example, the ST continuation rate varies as shown in FIG. 10-1),
In the special state, it is possible to execute a continuation rate suggesting effect that suggests the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state to the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), a continuation rate suggesting effect can be executed. is there).

According to such a configuration, since the continuation rate suggesting effect that suggests the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state to the player is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the effect that suggests the setting, which makes the game interesting. improves.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The continuation rate suggesting effect is an effect executed at the end of the advantageous state (for example, the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed in the ending period).

With such a configuration, attention can be paid when the advantageous state ends, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
A plurality of types of effect modes of the continuation rate suggestive effect are provided, and include any effect mode that can be executed with any set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3, characters A to C have any set value). Even can be done).

According to such a configuration, the set value can be suitably suggested, and the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The plurality of types of continuation rate suggesting effects include an effect mode in which it is determined that a high continuation rate that is highly advantageous to the player is set (for example, as shown in FIG. A character D whose setting is confirmed to be set is included).

According to such a configuration, the set value can be suitably suggested, and the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Holding storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding storage information;
Determination means (for example, S110 in FIG. 5) that determines whether or not to set the advantageous state based on the pending storage information,
Determination means (for example, S101 in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to set the advantageous state before the determination by the determination means,
In the advantageous state, if the pending storage information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the pending storage unit based on the determination result of the determination unit, the advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state. Further, a holding continuous production execution means capable of executing a continuous holding production that suggests (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous holding production of FIG. 10-6),
The holding continuous production execution means can execute the holding continuous production in the same manner as the continuation rate suggesting production (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the holding continuous production is similar to the continuation rate suggesting production. The character appears).

With such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved by combining the continuation rate suggesting effect and the held consecutive effect.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above,
Further provided is a determination information output unit (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting determination information regarding the determination result of the determination unit (for example, a performance control command for designating a display result),
The holding continuous production execution means,
Executing the holding continuous effect based on the judgment information output from the judgment information output means (for example, executing the holding continuous effect based on an effect control command designating a display result).
When the determination information output from the determination information output unit is not normal, at least the execution of the holding continuous production in the same production mode as the continuation rate suggesting production is restricted (for example, production control for designating a display result). If the command is not normal, the CPU 120 for effect control limits execution of the continuous holding effect in the same effect mode as the continuation rate suggesting effect).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent suggesting incorrect information to the player.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
An operating means (for example, push button 31B) operable by the player is further provided,
The continuation rate suggesting effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means (for example, the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

With such a configuration, the player's motivation for operation can be improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 9-9, FIG. 9-13 Step 112 IWS108),
Based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output means, a continuation rate suggesting effect executing means capable of executing the continuation rate suggesting effect (for example, effect control CPU 120, continuation rate suggesting effect in FIG. 10-4). ) And
When the setting value information output from the setting value information output means is not normal, the continuation rate suggesting effect executing means is determined to be set to a predetermined continuation rate that is at least highly advantageous to the player. The execution control of the continuation rate suggesting effect is restricted (for example, when the set value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 restricts the execution of the continuation rate suggesting effect of high setting confirmation).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent suggesting an incorrect set value to the player without reducing the number of executions of the continuation rate suggesting effect.

(Explanation of Invention Concerning Characteristic Section 249F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 249F includes the following inventions regarding the characteristic portion 249F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, depending on the set value before and after the change of the set value, any one of giraffe, elephant, and lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information to suggest the set value. There was a game machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). Further, there has been a gaming machine in which the high probability state is maintained until the variable display of the identification information of a specific number of times is executed (for example, see JP 2011-218044 A).

However, when performing an effect that suggests a setting as in JP 2010-200902 A on a gaming machine such as JP 2011-218044 A, there is room for improvement in the timing of executing an effect that suggests a setting. It was In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 249F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player, and ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state becomes high until variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) ( For example, the CPU 103)
The probability that the advantageous state is controlled in the special state varies depending on the set value (for example, the ST continuation rate varies as shown in FIG. 10-1),
In the special state, the advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled at the first number of times and when the advantageous state is controlled at the second number of times different from the first number. The execution rate of the setting suggesting effect that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST and from 21 to 21 from the start of ST). The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times)).

According to such a configuration, in the special state, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different between when the first state is controlled to the advantageous state and when the second state is controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to draw attention to the execution timing of the performance that suggests the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a predetermined game a plurality of times (for example, a state in which a round game is repeated),
The setting suggestion effect is an effect executed during the predetermined game (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed during a round).

With such a configuration, the predetermined game can be paid attention, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the advantageous state is controlled at the first number of times, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the advantageous state is controlled at the second number of times (for example, in FIG. As shown, when the jackpot is controlled at 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the jackpot is controlled at 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST. In the setting suggestion production is not executed)).

According to such a configuration, by controlling the advantageous state at the first time, the interest state is improved by continuing the advantageous state, and attention can be paid to the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The second number of times is the number of times after the first number of times (for example, the 21st to 100th rotations are the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotations).

With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, even if the advantageous state is controlled a number of times earlier than the second number of times, it is possible to prevent the loss from being considered.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The first number is a number after the second number (for example, the first number is the number immediately before the end of ST, and the second number is the number immediately after the start of ST).

With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled and the advantageous state is controlled at a number of times slower than the second number of times, it is possible to give a sense of security and focus attention on the execution of the setting suggestion effect. ..

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
In the special state, a predetermined period including the first number of times but not the second number of times is provided (for example, the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is the first number of times). It includes 1st to 20th rotations but does not include 21st to 100th rotations).

With such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the advantageous state is controlled within the predetermined period.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 9-9, FIG. 9-13 Step 112 IWS108),
A setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output means (for example, effect control CPU 120, setting suggestion effect processing of FIG. 10-9), Further equipped with,
If the setting value information output from the setting value information output means is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As described above, the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, if the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the low setting suggestion effect).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous setting value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(8) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player, and ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state becomes high until variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) ( For example, the CPU 103)
The probability that the advantageous state is controlled in the special state varies depending on the set value (for example, the ST continuation rate varies as shown in FIG. 10-1),
In the special state, when the advantageous state is controlled the first time, the advantageous state is controlled more than when the advantageous state is controlled the second time different from the first number. The reliability of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is high (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, 21 to 21 from the start of ST) Since the setting suggestion effect having higher reliability is executed than when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high).

With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the setting suggestion effect when the first state is controlled to the advantageous state in the special state, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Characteristic Section 250F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 250F includes the following inventions regarding the above-described characteristic portion 250F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, depending on the set value before and after the change of the set value, any one of giraffe, elephant, and lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information to suggest the set value. There was a game machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). Further, there has been a gaming machine in which the high probability state is maintained until the variable display of the identification information of a specific number of times is executed (for example, see JP 2011-218044 A).

However, when performing an effect that suggests a setting as in JP 2010-200902 A on a gaming machine such as JP 2011-218044 A, there is room for improvement in the timing of executing an effect that suggests a setting. It was In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 250F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player, and ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state becomes high until variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) ( For example, the CPU 103)
The probability that the advantageous state is controlled in the special state varies depending on the set value (for example, the ST continuation rate varies as shown in FIG. 10-1),
In the special state, the advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled at the first number of times and when the advantageous state is controlled at the second number of times different from the first number. The production mode of the setting suggestive production that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST and from 21 to 21 from the start of ST). The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect differs when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation).

According to such a configuration, since the presentation mode of the setting suggestion production is different between when the special state is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time and when it is controlled to the advantageous state at the second time, It is possible to draw attention to the execution timing of the performance that suggests the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a predetermined game a plurality of times (for example, a state in which a round game is repeated),
The setting suggestion effect is an effect executed during the predetermined game (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed during a round).

With such a configuration, the predetermined game can be paid attention, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the advantageous state is controlled at the first time, the execution rate of the setting suggestive effect is higher than when the advantageous state is controlled at the second time (for example, in FIG. As shown, when the big hit is controlled at 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the big hit is controlled at 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST).

According to such a configuration, by controlling the advantageous state at the first time, the interest state is improved by continuing the advantageous state, and attention can be paid to the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The second number of times is the number of times after the first number of times (for example, the 21st to 100th rotations are the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotations).

With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, even if the advantageous state is controlled a number of times earlier than the second number of times, it is possible to prevent the loss from being considered.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The first number is a number after the second number (for example, the first number is the number immediately before the end of ST, and the second number is the number immediately after the start of ST).

With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled and the advantageous state is controlled at a number of times slower than the second number of times, it is possible to give a sense of security and focus attention on the execution of the setting suggestion effect. ..

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
In the special state, a predetermined period including the first number of times but not the second number of times is provided (for example, the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is the first number of times). It includes 1st to 20th rotations but does not include 21st to 100th rotations).

With such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the advantageous state is controlled within the predetermined period.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 9-9, FIG. 9-13 Step 112 IWS108),
A setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output means (for example, effect control CPU 120, setting suggestion effect processing of FIG. 10-13), Further equipped with,
If the setting value information output from the setting value information output means is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As described above, the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, if the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the low setting suggestion effect).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous setting value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(8) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player, and ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state becomes high until variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) ( For example, the CPU 103)
The probability that the advantageous state is controlled in the special state varies depending on the set value (for example, the ST continuation rate varies as shown in FIG. 10-1),
In the special state, when the advantageous state is controlled the first time, the advantageous state is controlled more than when the advantageous state is controlled the second time different from the first number. The reliability of the setting suggesting effect that suggests to the player is high (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, 21 to 21 from the start of ST). (The reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high because the setting suggestion effect having higher reliability is executed as compared to when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation.)

With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the setting suggestion effect when the first state is controlled to the advantageous state in the special state, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 109AK)
Next, the characteristic part 109AK of the present embodiment will be described. In the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, a normal symbol display 20, Although a plurality of types of display devices (display devices) such as the universal figure reservation display device 25C are provided in separate places, these display devices may be provided together. For example, an information display device 109AK001 as shown in FIG. 11-1(A) is displayed as the information display device 109AK001 shown in FIG. Device (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, 1st reservation indicator 25A, 2nd reservation indicator 25B, normal symbol indicator 20, ordinary figure reservation indicator 25C) to be provided in place of You may The information display device 109AK001 may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position visible to the player from the front, lower left, lower right, etc. in the game area).

As shown in FIGS. 11-1(A) and (B), the information display device 109AK001 includes a plurality of display parts configured by lamps such as LEDs, and displays game-related information depending on the lighting state of each display part. To do. Each display part of the information display device 109AK001 is a first special symbol display device 109AK4A, a second special symbol display device 109AK4B, a first reserved display 109AK25A, a second reserved display 109AK25B, a normal symbol display 109AK20, and a universal figure. It is the hold indicator 109AK25C. Further, the information display device 109AK001 indicates a round number indicator 109AK011 indicating the total number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, a time saving state indicator 109AK012 indicating the time saving state, and a probable variation state in the jackpot playing state. The probability change state indicator 109AK013 is provided as a display portion. As described above, the information display device 109AK001 is one module for displaying a plurality of types of game-related information. Each display part in the information display device 109AK001 is configured by, for example, the same LED. By doing so, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Each of the first special symbol display device 109AK4A and the second special symbol display device 109AK4B is composed of eight display parts (LED), and a display result (winning pattern) is obtained by a combination (lighting pattern) of turning on and off the eight display parts. Type) is displayed. It is arbitrary which lighting pattern is assigned to the loss or the hit type.

Each of the first hold indicator 109AK25A and the second hold indicator 109AK25B is composed of four display parts (LEDs), and displays the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number according to the number of lights.

The normal symbol display device 109AK20 is composed of four display parts (LEDs), and displays the display result (type of hit) by the lighting pattern of the four display parts. It is arbitrary which lighting pattern is assigned to the loss or the hit type.

The universal figure hold indicator 109AK25C is composed of four display parts (LEDs), and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves by the number of lights.

The number-of-rounds indicator 109AK011 is composed of six display parts (LEDs), and displays the total number of rounds in the big hit game state in the big hit game state by the lighting pattern of the six display parts. Which lighting pattern is assigned to which round number may be arbitrary.

The time saving state indicator 109AK012 is composed of one display portion (LED), and lights to indicate that it is in the time saving state. The probability variation state indicator 109AK013 is composed of one display part (LED), and lights up to indicate that it is in the probability variation state.

The shape of the information display device 109AK001 and the number, shape, and arrangement of display parts may be arbitrary as long as various game-related information can be displayed. For example, the display portion of the information display device 109AK001 may be composed of 7-segment LEDs. Information other than the game-related information shown above may be displayed on the information display device 109AK001, or a part of the game-related information may not be displayed.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, a RAM clearing process in which the range for clearing (initializing) the RAM 102 is different according to the state (operation) at the time of starting up is executed. As shown in FIG. 11B, when the initialization operation (clear switch is on, setting key 112IW051 is off and power is turned on) at the time of startup, all contents stored in the RAM 102 are cleared. When the power failure recovery operation (clear switch and setting key 112IW051 is turned off and power is turned on) is performed at the time of startup, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are retained. When a setting change operation (clear switch and setting key 112IW051 is turned on and power is turned on) is performed at startup, the information regarding the special figure display result and the general figure display result in the storage content of the RAM 102 is retained and other information is cleared. To be done. A state in which a setting change operation is performed at startup and the set value can be changed is also referred to as a change permission state. In addition, when the setting change operation is performed at the time of startup, the information about the display result is retained, but the information about the game state and the pending storage information are cleared. Therefore, when the initialization operation is performed and the setting change operation is performed. Therefore, the degree of advantage to the player does not differ except for the set value. Thereby, a fair game can be provided. Note that FIG. 11B shows some of the information stored in the RAM 102, but other information (various flags, determination results, etc.) is all information when initialized at startup. When is cleared and the power failure recovery operation is performed at startup, all information is retained. When a setting change operation is performed at the time of startup, other information may be cleared or arbitrary information may be held.

11-3 to 11-6 are examples of the display operation of the information display device 109AK001 when the power is turned off during the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then turned on.

In FIG. 11-3(A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being activated (power ON), the first special symbol display device 109AK4A displays a lost symbol, and the first reserved memory 109AK25A indicates the first reserved memory number. It is displayed that there are three. In addition, a normal figure lost design is displayed on the normal symbol display 109AK20, and it is displayed that the number of stored general figure reservations is one on the general figure hold display 109AK25C. Then, the time saving state indicator 109AK012 is turned on, which indicates that the gaming state is the time saving state. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B). After that, when a power failure recovery operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the storage contents of the RAM 102 are held, and the control for displaying the game-related information is executed again based on the storage contents. Then, as shown in FIG. 11C, the information display device 109AK001 is restored to the display state before the power was turned off.

In FIG. 11-4(A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in operation, the first special symbol display device 109AK4A displays the lost symbol, and the normal symbol display 109AK20 displays the normal symbol lost symbol. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. After that, when a power failure recovery operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the storage contents of the RAM 102 are retained, and the control for displaying the game-related information is executed again based on the storage contents. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-4(C), the information display device 109AK001 is restored to the display state before the power was turned off.

In FIG. 11-5(A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being activated, the first special symbol display device 109AK4A displays a lost symbol, and the first reserve indicator 109AK25A has three first reserve memory numbers. Is displayed. In addition, a normal figure lost design is displayed on the normal symbol display 109AK20, and it is displayed that the number of stored general figure reservations is one on the general figure hold display 109AK25C. Then, the time saving state indicator 109AK012 is turned on, which indicates that the gaming state is the time saving state. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 11-5(B), all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. After that, if an initialization operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the contents stored in the RAM 102 are erased. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-5(C), the information display device 109AK001 is in the all-off state even after the power is turned on.

In FIG. 11-6(A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in operation, the first special symbol display device 109AK4A displays the lost symbol, and the normal symbol display 109AK20 displays the normal symbol lost symbol. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 11-6(B), all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. After that, when the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned on during the setting change (in the change permitted state), as shown in FIG. 11-6(C). .. When the change permission state ends, the information regarding the special figure display result and the general figure display result among the storage contents of the RAM 102 is held, and the control for displaying the game related information is executed again based on the storage contents. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-6(D), the first special symbol display device 109AK4A displays the lost design, the normal symbol display 109AK20 displays the general design lost design, and the display before the power is turned off. Same as the state.

As shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the setting change operation is performed at power-on (at the time of startup), the information about the special figure display result and the general figure display result is retained. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-6(D), even when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the display result is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A and the normal symbol display 109AK20 as before the power is turned off. can do. The display state of the information display device 109AK001 is the same as that when the power failure recovery operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 11-4(C). Therefore, even when the player checks the information display device 109AK001 when the hall is opened, it is difficult to know whether the power outage recovery operation or the setting change operation is executed. In addition, since it is not possible to know whether or not the setting has been changed due to the display state of the information display device 109AK001 at the time of startup, it is not necessary to initialize the remaining gaming machines when the settings of some gaming machines are changed. It is possible for a person to simplify the work of starting a plurality of gaming machines.

Further, it is preferable that the display of the image display device 5 at the time of startup is also common (for example, a screen indicating that the image has been started) regardless of the operation at startup. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to know which operation has been performed at the time of startup by the display of the image display device 5. It should be noted that in order to enable confirmation by a hall employee or the like, the processing (initialization processing, restoration processing, setting change processing, etc.) executed on the image display device 5 at startup may be displayed.

When the setting is changed when the power is turned on (at the time of startup), the information other than the information regarding the special figure display result and the general figure display result is cleared, so that the first hold indicator 109AK25A, Even when the second hold indicator 109AK25B, the universal figure hold indicator 109AK25C, the number of rounds indicator 109AK011, the time saving state indicator 109AK012, and the probability variation state indicator 109AK013 are lit, the information related to these indicators is cleared during the setting change operation. Therefore, these display parts are turned off after the setting change operation.

(Modification of the characteristic part 109AK)
This feature part is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Further, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Further, this feature part and other feature parts may be appropriately combined. For example, the configuration of at least part of the characteristic portions 248F to 250F may be introduced into the present characteristic portion.

In the above-described embodiment, when the initialization operation is performed when the power is turned on, the information display device 109AK001 is set to be in the all-off state after the power is turned on. However, when the initialization operation is performed when the power is turned on, The special symbol display device 109AK4A (or the second special symbol display device 109AK4B) and the normal symbol display device 109AK20 may display the symbol with the highest appearance frequency (for example, a lost symbol). By doing so, even during the initialization operation, the display of the information display device 109AK001 at the time of startup is the same as during the power failure recovery operation or the setting change operation (for example, FIG. 11-3(C) or FIG. 11-6 ( D)) is possible, and the display can be substantially common regardless of which operation is performed at the time of startup. As a result, even if the information display device 109AK001 is checked, it becomes more difficult to know which operation has been performed.

In the above-described embodiment, when the setting change operation is performed at the time of start-up, the information regarding the special figure display result and the general figure display result among the storage contents of the RAM 102 is retained and other information is cleared. Alternatively, some of other information may be held. Also, all the information may be cleared. In this case, when the setting change operation is performed at power-on, the first special symbol display device 109AK4A (or the second special symbol display device 109AK4B) and the normal symbol display 109AK20, the symbol with the highest appearance frequency (for example, a lost symbol) May be displayed. By doing so, even if the RAM clearing process similar to that at the time of the initialization operation is executed at the time of the setting change operation, the display of the information display device 109AK001 at the start-up is the same as that at the time of the power failure recovery operation or the setting change operation ( For example, FIG. 11-3(C) or FIG. 11-6(D) can be displayed, and the display can be substantially common regardless of which operation is performed at the time of startup.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 109AK)
As a pachinko gaming machine capable of setting a set value, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the stored contents other than the set value are cleared when the setting change process is performed.
In such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement regarding the handling of the information held when the settings are changed.
The gaming machine according to the characteristic unit 109AK is made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately holds information when a setting is changed and makes it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed. And
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic unit 109AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13, etc.) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3) out of the plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player )When,
Setting control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling to a change permitted state that permits the setting value to be changed by the setting means based on the setting change permission operation;
An information display unit (for example, an information display device 109AK001) for displaying a plurality of game-related information regarding a game,
The information display means,
When the power outage recovery operation is performed, the control for displaying all the game-related information displayed before the power outage recovery operation is executed again (for example, FIG. 11-3, FIG. 11-4),
When the change permission state is controlled based on the setting change permission operation, a control for displaying a part of the game-related information (of the contents displayed before the change permission operation) after the change permission state ends. Is executed (for example, FIG. 11-6).
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable display means for executing variable display is provided,
The game-related information may include at least information regarding the number of variable displays that have been held (for example, the first held storage number and the second held storage number).
With such a configuration, important information about the game can be displayed.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
It is possible to execute the initialization processing in which the initialization range of the storage area is different between when the initialization operation is performed and when the change permission state is controlled based on the setting change permission operation (for example, FIG. 11- 2) may be performed.
With such a configuration, an appropriate initialization process can be executed according to the situation.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The game-related information displayed after the change permission state ends may include at least a display result of a special symbol and a normal symbol.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The degree of advantage of the gaming machine is the same when the initialization operation is performed and when the setting change permission state is ended (the information regarding the gaming state is cleared as shown in FIG. 11-2). May be.
With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the difference in the degree of advantage for the player between the initialization operation and the setting change.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Display control means for executing display control of the display means based on information from the game control means,
The display control means may execute the same display control when an initialization operation is performed and when the change permission state is ended.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 110AK)
Next, the characteristic part 110AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the counting effect setting process related to the characteristic unit 110AK. In the characteristic unit 110AK, it is possible to execute a counting effect of displaying a numerical value (for example, a numerical value of “3”) on the image display device 5 and displaying the numerical value in a countdown manner. When "0") is reached, a specific effect for informing that the expected degree (various jackpot reliability etc.) of the variable display being executed is high is executed. The counting effect setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the counting effect and an effect mode (count value) when executing the counting effect. The counting effect setting process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7, for example.

In the count effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the count effect (step 110AKS001). In the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the counting effect is determined based on the display result specified by the variable display result notification command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, whether or not to execute the counting effect is determined at different rates depending on which is the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-8 shows the determination rate of whether or not to execute the counting effect in step 110AKS001. FIG. 11-8(A) is the determination rate (the execution rate of the counting effect) when the setting value is 3, and FIG. 11-8(B) is the determination rate (the counting effect of the setting effect) when the setting value is 2. 11-8(C) is the determination rate (execution rate of the counting effect) when the set value is 1.

As shown in FIG. 11-8, when the display result is a big hit, the counting effect is more likely to be executed than when the display result is super reach loss or other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss). In addition, when the display result is super reach loss, the counting effect is more easily executed than when it is other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss). By doing so, when the counting effect is executed, the ratio of the big hit or the super reach is higher than when it is not executed, and the player's expectation can be increased by the counting effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the characteristic part 110AK, the execution rate of the counting effect differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the setting value 3 with the highest jackpot probability is the highest, the ratio of the counting effect is executed is high, and when the setting value 1 is the lowest with the probability of the big hit, the ratio the counting effect is executed is the lowest. Has become. In this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to decide to execute the counting effect. By doing so, the set value can be suggested to the player by the execution frequency of the counting effect. When it is suggested that the value is a high setting value, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game for a long period of time and improve the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In FIG. 11-8, the execution rate of the counting effect when the display result is a big hit is constant (50%) regardless of the set value, but the execution rate of the counting effect may be changed depending on the set value.

After determining whether or not to execute the counting effect in step 110AKS001, it is determined whether or not to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS002). When it is determined not to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS002; No), the counting effect setting process ends.

When it is determined to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS002; Yes), a final count value in the counting effect (how many counts down from the initial value “3”) is determined (step 110AKS003). In this embodiment, the final count value in the counting effect is determined based on the display result specified by the variable display result notification command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. Further, the final count value in the counting effect is determined at different rates depending on which is the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-9 shows the determination rate of the final count value in step 110AKS003. The counting effect of the count value "3" in FIG. 11-9 is a counting effect in which the numerical value of "3" is displayed and the numerical value is erased as it is, as shown in FIG. 11-10. As shown in FIG. 11-10, the counting effect of the count value “2” in FIG. 11-9 is a count in which the value “3” is displayed and the value is erased after changing from “3” to “2”. It is a production. As shown in FIG. 11-10, the counting effect of the count value “1” in FIG. 11-9 is that after the numerical value of “3” is displayed and the value gradually changes from “3”→“2”→“1”. , Is a counting effect that erases numerical values. As shown in FIG. 11-10, the numerical representation of the count value “0” in FIG. 11-9 shows the numerical value of “3” and is stepwise as “3”→“2”→“1”→“0”. After that, the numerical value is erased, and then the specific effect for notifying that the degree of expectation is high is a counting effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when the display result is a big hit, the count value is easily set to “0”, and when the display result is other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss), the count value is It is not decided to be "0". By doing so, it is possible to increase the probability (big hit reliability) of a jackpot when the numerical value is counted down (counted) to “0” by the counting effect and the specific effect is executed, and the specific effect is executed. If it is done, at least the super-reach will be lost, so the player's expectation can be increased by the counting effect and the specific effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the characteristic part 110AK, the final count value determination rate differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the display result shows a super-reach loss, the higher the set value is, the harder it is to determine the count value "0", and the higher the set value, the larger the value is likely to be determined. Further, when the display result is other, the higher the set value, the easier it is to determine a larger numerical value. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the specific effect is not executed and the counting effect ends, and the probability that the counting effect ends when the countdown (counting) does not proceed (in the middle) is higher. By doing so, although the counting effect has been executed, the player is discouraged because the counting effect ends and the specific effect is not executed when the countdown (counting) does not proceed, and the set value is high. Since this can be suggested, it is possible to improve the effect of the counting effect and improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, when the set value is low, the countdown (counting) easily proceeds, and the count value becomes “0”, and the specific effect is easily executed. Therefore, when the set value is low, it is possible to expect the player that the numerical value becomes the specific value and the specific effect is executed, and the effect of the counting effect is improved.

Further, in the determination rate shown in FIG. 11-9, when the count value is “3”, the set value is 3, and when the count value is “2”, the set value is 2. When the ratio is high and the count value is “1”, the ratio of the set value being 1 is high. Therefore, when the count value is “3”, the set value is 3, and when the count value is “2”, the set value is 2, and the count value is “1”. If it ends with “”, it can be suggested that the set value is 1. In this way, it is designed to suggest the setting value corresponding to the county value when the counting effect ended halfway, the ending value, so you can understand the suggestion of the setting value when the counting effect ends halfway. It will be easier.

Note that the determination rates shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 are examples, and the higher the set value, the easier the counting effect is executed, and the higher the set value, the larger the counted value ends at the stage of a large numerical value. If it is easy and the lower the set value is, the easier the counting is to proceed, and the more easily the counting value becomes “0”, the execution rate of the counting effect and the determination rate of the counting value may be arbitrary. That is, the determination ratio may be arbitrary as long as the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

After the final count value in the counting effect is determined in step 110AKS003, the effect control pattern corresponding to the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 110AKS004), and the counting effect setting process ends. The effect control pattern set in step 110AKS004 is read in the variable display effect effect process of step S172 of FIG. 7, so that the counting effect corresponding to the determination result is executed.

11-11 and 11-12 are examples of effect operation when the counting effect is executed. FIG. 11-11(A) shows that the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 are in the reach mode when the decorative pattern showing the numeral 7 is stopped. ing. Then, when developing to super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-11(B), an image indicating super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper left portion. ..

Here, in the count effect setting process, when it is determined that the count effect with the final count value being “0” is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-11(C), during the reach effect is being executed. , A numerical value of “3” is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right portion) of the image display device 5, and the numerical value is “3”→“2” as shown in FIGS. 11-11(D) to (F). -> "1" -> "0" changes step by step. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11(G), the specific effect in which the numerical value is erased and the character image “heat” is displayed is executed.

Next, another example of the production operation will be described. FIG. 11-12(A) shows that the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 are in the reach mode in which the decorative pattern showing the numeral 7 is stopped. ing. After that, when developing to super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-12(B), an image indicating super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper left portion. ..

Here, in the count effect setting process, when it is determined that the count effect with the final count value being “3” is determined, as shown in FIG. 11-12(C), during the reach effect is being executed. A numerical value of “3” is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right portion) of the image display device 5. After that, the numerical value is not counted down, and the numerical value is erased as shown in FIG. 11-12(D). Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12(E), the decorative pattern of the lost combination is derived and displayed. In this way, when the numerical value of the counting effect ends at the stage of "3", the jackpot reliability of the variable display becomes low, but it is suggested that the set value is high, so the expectation of the player is maintained. can do.

11-11 and 11-12 show an example in which the counting effect is executed after the reach is established, but the counting effect may be started before the reach is reached (before the left and right symbols are stopped). ..

(Modification of the characteristic part 110AK)
This feature part is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Further, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Further, this feature part and other feature parts may be appropriately combined. For example, the configuration of at least part of the characteristic portions 248F to 250F may be introduced into the present characteristic portion.

In the above embodiment, the initial value of the numerical value in the counting effect is "3" and the specific value is "0", but other numerical values may be used. For example, the initial value may be one of a plurality of types. By doing so, it is possible to expect that the numerical value becomes the specific value as the initial value of the numerical value is closer to the specific value, so that the interest of the production is improved. Further, the numerical value in the counting effect is not limited to counting down, and may be counting up. In this case, the specific effect may be executed when the counted-up numerical value reaches the specific value. Further, the numerical value to be counted does not necessarily have to be continuously counted.

There may be a plurality of types of production modes (numerical color, counting speed, numerical font, numerical initial value, numerical display position, etc.) for the counting effect. Further, the production mode (numerical color, etc.) may be changed during the counting production. Then, the ratio of the specific value, the jackpot reliability, the ratio of the super reach, and the like may be different according to the effect mode of the counting effect. Moreover, you may make it suggest a setting value according to the production|generation aspect of counting production. For example, red and white may be provided as numerical colors, and red may be more likely to reach a specific value (more likely to be a big hit) than white. In addition, red may be set to have a higher accuracy of the set value suggested when the counting effect ends midway than white. In addition, a plurality of counting speeds may be provided, and the ratio of reaching a specific value (being a big hit) may be different according to the counting speed. Also, the accuracy of the set value suggested when the counting effect ends midway may be changed according to the counting speed. By doing so, attention can be paid to the counting effect.

Moreover, you may make it perform the count effect which suspends a count and restarts a count after that. For example, when another effect (preliminary effect, reach effect, etc.) is executed during the execution of the counting effect, the counting effect (counting) is interrupted during the execution period of the other effect, and The counting effect (counting) may be restarted after the end.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the counting effect is an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the variable display (the change notice advance notice effect), but it is an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the variable display before execution (prefetch notice effect). Good. Further, the counting effect may be executed across a plurality of variable displays. The counting effect may be executed in the big hit game state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the specific effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot reliability is high (an effect indicating that the jackpot is a big hit), but it may be an effect indicating that it is advantageous to the player. For example, an effect that suggests that it will be an advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds when the jackpot is a big hit or an effect that suggests whether or not it is a jackpot), or the gaming state is a jackpot state when the gaming state is not reported. It may be an effect or the like suggesting. Further, when the counting effect is executed in the big hit game state, it may be an effect that suggests the number of rounds of the big hit, or an effect that indicates promotion to the probability variation big hit. In a gaming machine that can be controlled in a probable state based on the fact that a game ball has entered a specific area within the special winning opening, the effect may be that the game ball has entered the specific area.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 110AK)
As a pachinko gaming machine capable of setting a set value, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, an effect of suggesting a set value can be executed.
In such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the rendering method.
The gaming machine according to the characteristic unit 110AK has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine with improved entertainment and improved entertainment.
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 110AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13, etc.) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3) out of the plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player )When,
A numerical value display means for changing and displaying a numerical value (for example, a production control CPU 120 for executing a counting production),
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect for executing the specific effect) capable of executing the specific effect (for example, FIG. 11-11(G)) when the numerical value displayed by the numerical value display means becomes the specific value (for example, “0”). And a control CPU 120),
The numerical value display means,
When the display of the numerical value is ended after changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, FIG. 11-11), and when the display of the numerical value is ended before changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, FIG. 11-12). And there is
The more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the rate of ending the display of the numerical value before changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, the higher the set value in 110AKS003, the count value "0"). Is difficult to determine).
With such a structure, the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The more advantageous the set value that has been set for the player, the easier it is for the numerical value to be displayed by the numerical value display means (for example, the higher the set value in 110AKS001, the easier it is to decide to execute the counting effect). You may do it.
With such a structure, the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the numerical value is displayed by the numerical value display means, the more advantageous the set value that has been set for the player, the higher the rate of ending the numerical value display at the stage where the change is small (for example, the set value in 110AKS003). Is higher, the higher the count value is, the higher the count value is likely to be determined).
With such a structure, the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
There may be a plurality of types of numerical value display modes by the numerical value display means.
With such a structure, the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
There may be a plurality of types of rate of change of the numerical value by the numerical value display means.
With such a structure, the interest of the game is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The numerical value display means may be capable of temporarily hiding the numerical value when changing and displaying the numerical value.
With such a structure, the interest of the game is improved.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 2 gaming board, 3 gaming machine frame, 4A, 4B special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker , 9 Game effect lamps, 10 General winning holes, 11 Main board, 12
Production control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay board, 20 ordinary pattern display, 21 gate switch, 22A, 22B start opening switch, 23 count switch, 30 ball hitting handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push Buttons, 32 movable bodies, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104, 124 random number circuit, 105, 125 I/O, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control section.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed yet ,
A predetermined effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect for changing the display mode of the specific display displayed by the specific display means;
Specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect when the display mode of the specific display is changed by the predetermined effect ,
Equipped with
The specific rendering means includes a first rendering means and a second rendering means,
In accordance with the ratio being controlled in the preferred state, as the specific effect, the first and the specific effect of using the first effect hand stage, a second specific effect of using pre-Symbol second effect hand stage, the first effect the third and the specific effect of using both the a means second representation section, being capable of performing one of,
When the display mode of one specific display is changed by the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect means changes the display mode of the other specific display by executing the predetermined effect on another specific display. It is possible to
One specific display of the display mode is changed, if the specific effect of using the sac Chi hand the first representation section and the second representation section is executed, the other display mode of the specific display When the change , the execution of the specific effect using the other of the first effect means and the second effect means is restricted.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images